Home

2011 Chrysler Owner Manual

1. 277 W CD DVD Disc Maintenance 295 A Hard So AP m 277 W Radio Operation And Mobile Phones 295 api MC ee 277 W Climate Controls sa ER dye E RR RESI Xs 296 O Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Settings O General Overview os 44444 Ren oh She eee 296 Customer Programmable Features 277 l O Climate Control Functions 301 N Setting The Analog Clock 292 TE Temperature TA 302 ma Mo LN EE de aay ee EO pers TDS osse and uie t oo BY erar iae 304 W Steering Wheel Audio Controls 293 Hi Radio Operation s cia exu BE Re gee els 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES D DUE AT F J OOG 040135841 Air Outlet 7 ESC Off Switch 13 Engine Start Stop Button 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Uconnect Touch System Hard Controls 14 Trunk Release Button 3 Hazard Switch 9 SD Memory Card Slot 15 Dimmer Controls 4 Uconnect Touch System 10 Power Outlet 16 Hood Release 5 Climate Control Hard Controls 11 CD DVD Slot 17 Headlight Switch 6 Glove Compartment 12 Storage Compartment 18 Analog Clock 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DE D B DA aq fij o N 60 100 EN a 120 FA PRND AM Gog N D SA TTEYS vd HOD 20 19 1 7 Qe 040336511 INSTRUMENT CLUS
2. 446 478 enu ergs rri DAE EE FEE cata 446 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 82 378 Pots ie Ola io ske ARE Re ARE TAS ana RE 915 Hooded INGE is ee sse Cu ES STU ss 315 Fuel ISequitemelilb s sco ed mios ipid pai 374 AD LEEN sous Ek ES DEU ES FEY PS EE A14 Multi Displacement ses ss se ke se 329 v P ET EG 433 477 478 Oil Chance Interval 4 54 3 5 x og ac edd eos 271 434 OUNCE COD ssp a ers gp RC RERO 434 435 Slo Cnm 436 Oil Filter Disposal esse ERO EwERET LES 436 Oil Selection sue 40 crees 6 xe mE SP 434 477 Olr 5 uci EER REKE don e pube gie d 435 OVGIDP Ue as AARDE ERR oe HARD ee es 402 viria oe sen toa pees ooo GS Rs eas Re OA 312 Tempere Gade cuneo a dade Gare ER DEL DR 261 Engine Oil Viscosity sus ase n uses Hae wee es 434 435 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 66 Entry System Illuminated iss nes oy ms 20 PUNO 62 oe ect TTD 375 Event Data Recorde 4444444 qut 4456 4 eh Ret 69 Exhaust Gas Caution lesen 82 378 EXDSUSEDVSte li ss os Cp a bord e dod de x ndo s 82 443 Exterior Folding MITOS usps eun ese tissu di 25 Exterior LighUng xa ese S ESI OE DER ER EE 163 Bxrenorlicite ovaae READ RR ee eae pn De owe 85 Piller Locion FUG 222 oes biki HAD es 258 Filters zd GICANC eis ae RES ER e i hoe os 436 DIE Ad MOE s edm p 9 2 o9 WES eee ees 305 440 Puce REELE ERG Ghee MEE 436 478 516 INDEX NEE Id Engine CIL Di pos eau isi UR AE RR es 436 Flash To Pass
3. 385 I QUO CG usar e e rotos PEOR dE P 379 4 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 386 O E 85 General Information e 9 9 4 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 386 SHE ENON EO oe aks aa EL OVenoadine sooo oa Naha ted ne pees a4 386 ET del Requirements osmose sd ues 4 HYDE 380 aloading e ee 387 wae EMI occorre rom 387 O Common Towing Definitions 387 EENS Tr pe 381 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 El Trailer Mitch Classification 33 23 ve 390 BLONS DpS isi SPREI LORRIE 23 398 O Trailer Towing Weights lll Recreational Towing Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 391 Behind Motorhome Etc ss ss ss 399 O Trailer And Tongue Weight 092 H Two Wheel Drive And All Wheel Drive 399 O Towing Requirements ab ii de oes ace dde a 393 312 STARTING AND OPERATING NN ed STARTING PROCEDURES CAUTION Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat ing precautions are not observed belts e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the WARNING vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before
4. 161 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 N To Open And Close The Hood 162 O Lane Change Assist 168 NE RES ETE on ee oa ORE ee eae 163 O High Low Beam Switch ius aie oem ER RE ES 168 Hileadheht Switch 2a Ee ROSA es 163 ai EE MR RE EE EE ON 168 D Automatic Headlights If Equipped 164 O Front Map Reading Lights 169 E 3 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Hi mbient NE gatas 3 ecd Geen DAE SC oe 170 M E 165 Ulnterior Lights ee ooroo 170 Mx OE DE LEE s ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 172 MM ELE iun E Intermittent Wiper Systemi serri ed ns 179 ea ET d Viet Peace 173 EA OE ET ne o Windshield Washers llus 173 eek EE N DS ere pa dung 10 o Headlights On With Wipers Available With EM ul funebon Lever siekes der s 167 Automatic Headlights Only 174 DTM SIE Als ias ota Ue 9 anto dict hosce ded bri 167 O Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 174 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie W Tilt Telescoping Steering Column ll Power Tilt Telescoping Steering Column IP EQUIP DEO eu lt 4 d GELE HARARE RR ea 177 ll Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped 178 W Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 179 ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 180 EO JAEBUSIE 9 6344654 54 hoe aS be PLE 181 o To Set A Desired Speed ius tee de sea os 182 Alo Deactivate x sine bade dr PER Rd 182
5. 312 Cold Weather i adr ooo REDE AE TEES 314 Engine Fails to Staff i oes dod REED ae 315 KONDOI 54 299 meas en eb ee an eo het REPE 25 Starting and Operating see HERE RR Hens herd 912 Diamine DiGeediles 42 6 wag a ducis peser daro EE es 312 Steering Column oODIEO S ss ia ope 9 Puce atia 167 Col HOCK oos aro x rd teit ERE 176 lus A Cr LITT 328 Tilt Column 2222s RRERERES 176 177 Wheel Heated os sae co da Mede eeye Gee Eu 178 Wheel Tilt 2229 3 wa bore ee Rae aS 176 177 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 293 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound Dy Sem C ODDS Gave na saws ira 1 4 Ree n 293 110 AAS N EET EET 242 470 Dorade Veliel sis ba dee Rodeo 3o ES ss 304 470 Storing Your Veele 44 44 28 4 4448s Hed bees 470 vine PE iD m 418 Sun ROOI 249958 7 2292 9492432999993 227 231 URE lasses Orage 524 24a vee HADES HERE 220 N INDEX 527 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 56 way Control DIG sa eR erm NEE WE S 389 iden Eie CE sa ace 3 63 58 E READ HOER 435 System Remote Starting ba sre m omm E s 25 Tac NOMEE Pr 253 Telescoping Steering Column sse soo des 176 177 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 302 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 261 403 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 74 Theft Alarm Security Alarm kopie ca mr was 17 Theft System Security Alarm 17 TUE Steering CONN sai e a sie DR AR oen 176 177 Time Delay Headlight 4 42 iR HEER SE Ee 164 Tire and
6. Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop For Fuel e Check the engine oil level Refer to Maintenance Procedures Engine Oil in Maintaining Your Ve hicle for further information e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 484 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M Once A Month At Each Oil Change e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Change the engine oil filter damage e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake Failure to perform the required maintenance items master cylinder and power steering and add as may result in damage to the vehicle needed Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 485 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 16 000 Miles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the eng
7. 9 Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun Do a ille terclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly 2 Remove the trunk trim by removing the grocery hook using a 1 20 torque driver or similar tool remove the fastener and pull back the weather strip 10 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 11 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail 3 Pull back the trunk liner to gain access to the tail lamp lamp assembly and then tami clockwise wing nuts 12 Reinstall the tail lamp assembly fasteners electrical connector and trunk trim 13 Close the trunk 4 Remove the three wing nuts from the back of the tail lamp assembly 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Re License Lamp 1 Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 1 License Lamp Bulb 2 Socket 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia and then install the screws NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477 FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 5 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified Cooling System 0000000000000 Cooling System 3 6 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive MOPAR Antifreeze 11 1 Quarts 10 5 Liters Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 3 6 L
8. m Mobile E Voicemail Remove from Favs Favorites Buddy s Pizza r A Mom s Cell o Emergency e The Options pop up will display touch Remove from Favs Emergency And Towing Assistance The Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can only be altered These cannot be deleted and the names cannot be changed To change the Emergency or Towing number follow these steps e Touch the phonebook soft key from the Phone main screen e Touch the Favorites soft key Next scroll to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Favor ites e Touch the Options soft key e Touch the next to appropriate Favorite that is to be altered NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 68 af FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out W 72 Phonebook gt pie EE LS Mobile E Voicemail Edit Number l Reset to Default avorites Pepe Roni a Buddy s Pizza e The Options pop will appear and you can choose between Editing the number or resetting the number to default Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available and supported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service pro vider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Liste
9. SS Se SS SS ss se 338 Auto Down Power Windows 39 Auto Unlock Doors eee 31 Auto Up Power WIndows 4 249046 p42400s Fs 99 Automatic Dimming Mitror ses sewe hr SCR ss 94 N INDEX 511 Automatic Door Locks 00 30 31 Agtomauc THeadlgblsS siese R BR ER iri 164 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 271 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 302 Automatic Transaxle Special AddilVE 24 oboe 4 niin HR DE os eae 454 Automatic Transmission 319 453 455 Adding Fluid ux re RARR RE DI 455 479 wind WP 925 Fid and Filter Changes a case orar poe 455 PIG CMNO s ded oo wt opu yq KORE VR s 455 Eid Level Check x vesc BREER ED RE S 454 nM P es 479 Gear San BS son o xxt HERLEES d 319 vul rr Q 319 pes ddiNES aos a i PAR 45 rakia 454 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode 022 AWOSE 482524535445 tones PEST E EE ENS 323 AKOTU P 60545044 AE READ NEE 479 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 479 B PillaeOCanOn whi 3 244 bess pee a ce ae 348 Dalen A CT EMT 437 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 29 LOCAUON ua scere rrak RAAR SEE HERE OE ed 437 ef eie La OOS EA AE OE OR FR ES 46 83 Body Mechanism Lubrication 441 Brake Assist N EI sweer tele EED qug 335 Brake Control System Electronic s sis ord tm s 334 Drake iid uec fue sies KEER eons Bee 479 icio TT 451 AnU LOCK ABS uos ua ua a dae tbe be c ang an
10. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 WARNING The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicle s mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Opposing Traffic 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph 1 km h to 3 km h to objects moving a maxi mum of approximately 10 mph 16 km h such as in parking lot situations NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 NOTE Ina parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or ve
11. 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE settings for the driver seat side mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steer ing column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi tions when the UNLOCK button is pressed NOTE e Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions e Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the memory function Use either the memory recall switch or the RKE transmitter if linked to the memory feature to recall memory positions 1 or 2 The memory switch is located on the driver s door trim panel The switch contains an S button to activate the memory save function It also contains a rocker switch labeled with the number 1 and the number 2 The rocker switch allows the driver to recall either of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the appro priate side of the switch Memory Seat Switches Programming The Memory Feature NOTE Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 To create a new memory profile perform the following 1 Place the ignition into the RUN position 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences i e seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering col
12. 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg STARTING AND OPERATING 351 Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib of Occupant 3 160 Ibs Occupafi amp 100 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 865 Ibs U 70 BE 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Pu ama ee Es Dre Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 lbs Occupant 4 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs mater TE AUS oxi EV 540 ID 325 Ib Bi S 25 Ibs uae ies a c EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 352 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN ed WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions U
13. If Equipped 244 A Sunroot Fully Closed su tee tasas 235 o Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped With 60 40 W Electrical Power Outlets Ls 29D oplit Fofding Rear Seat W Cupholders 4o ds RS DRESS ES DER a 239 Mi Cargo Area Features i e O Front Seat Cupholders 239 D Trunk Mat If Equipped 246 D Rear Seat Cupholders 000 000 ee 240 Bl Rear Window Features ss ss ss ee 246 NOISE uei uev ER SE qu s 242 D Rear Window Defroster isses 246 O Glovebox Storage EE Ee ee 242 H Load Leveling System If Equipped 247 ll Power Sunscreen If Equipped 247 O Console Features 242 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME MIRRORS CAUTION Automatic Dimming Mirror This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you This feature will be defaulted on and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicl
14. Interior Lighting C Fuse Spare 0 Pink Washer Pump rue Spare 0 30 Amp Power Locks Pink 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 2 Fuse Spare LEER Es Red Port Red Module Clock xem x1 Blue Red LEEF moe era e 26 Fuse Spare EB Blue Ig a Natural Yellow Arm Rest IT Eme ee Natural 4 Fuse Spare Blue 3 15 Amp Ignition Switch Wireless 25 Amp Rear Heated Seats MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Steering Wheel 10 Amp Heated Cupholders Red 44 10 Amp Park Assist Blind Spot Rear Heated Seat Red Camera Switches 45 15 Amp Cluster Rearview 10 Amp HVAC Module In Car Blue Mirror Compass Red Temperature Sensor 46 10 Amp Adaptive Cruise Control jFue Spae Red px oem 10 Amp Adaptive Front Lighting Fue Spae Red Fue Spae 48 20 Amp Active Suspension 10 Amp Airbag Module Yellow Red 4 Fuse Spare 80 Fuse Spare KERE N 20 Amp Front Heated Seats Fuse Spare m Fuse Spare 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Description VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these
15. Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver s door trim panel 030434975 Power Mirror Control The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press the mirror select button for the mirror that you want to adjust Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 NOTE A light in the select button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information Power Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L left and R right Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position NOTE Pressing the power folding mirror switch for more than four seconds or if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h will disable the folding feature 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If the mirrors are in the folded position and vehicle speed is eq
16. e Touch the Dial soft key Buddy s Pizza e The Touch Tone screen will be displayed I 248 990 6543 J s Buttl e Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and xd pela aot touch Call To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press the vr button while in a call and say Send 1234 or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail Incoming Calls password is stored in your mobile phonebook e Outgoing Calls e Missed Calls 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA e All Calls These can be accessed by touching the recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the amp button and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the button to accept the call To ignore the call touch the Ignore soft key on the touch screen You can also touch the answer soft key or touch the blue caller ID box Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call w
17. Controls soft key and then press the Sun screen soft key to raise the power sunscreen Press the Sunscreen soft key a second time to lower the sun screen The power sunscreen can also be operated by passengers in the rears seats The power screen switch is located on the back of the center console between the heated seat switches Press the switch once to lower the sunscreen Press the switch a second time to raise the sunscreen Power Sunscreen Switch 037937643 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS B Instrument Panel Features 251 Mi Instrument Cluster 252 W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 253 ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 262 D Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Di Plae ss ae Ig wae ek a oe AE eae es 265 B EVIC White Telltales 266 O EVIC Amber Telltales 267 O EVIC Red Telitales 223 9 aa NR oem 268 o Oil Change Required HE PueLESONOIDU jas aure es vae d EIE gaan CA EC muse CONMOL aux 3 4093 RE ER DEERE 274 O Vehicle speed cries godes ERK HR AS oe s 274 EID TMG 45 5040 Chad ERLA RA EAT Rd 275 ADe a AT ARE RE EL ER ere are 276 O Vehicle Info Customer Information Features 276 ai EE RE TERE wise eae tan 277 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id EU Men O sn FOR OER OE NT 2d EED El eE ers ORR E HOE SARA ES 294 Bl Uconnect Touch Settings
18. Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS 11655 such as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s API GL 5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent API GL 5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent MOPAR Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44 40 or equivalent MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Bl Maintenance Schedule 482 O Required Maintenance Intervals 484 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 482 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More freguent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in
19. It provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and or front fascia bumper and the detected obstacle WARNING Ob ject Detected T a 032937958 Park Assist Display ParkSense Display The warning display will turn ON indicating the system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected Park Assist System On Park Assist ON 032937954 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Ob ject n La Detected m VI a E Pah Foot are dIE Afr LITT EI ham IL 032737807 032937957 Park Assist Off Slow Tone The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 WARNING WARNING Ob ject Ob ject Detected Detected ry r 3 032937956 032937955 Fast Tone Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING ALERTS po WARNING ALERTS in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 c
20. Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system on when not in use is dangerous You could acciden tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system off when you are not using it To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed ACC Set Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do not the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed If this occurs e The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the EVIC 032433098 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 e The system will not be controlling the distance be To Cancel tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle The system will disable ACC without erasing the speed will only be determined by the position of the memory if accelerator pedal e You softly tap the brake pedal e You depress the brake pedal 3 e You press the CANCEL switch e An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event occurs Driver Override e f the transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL n cn e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys ACC 55 mph tem ESC TCS activates 032433099 Driver Override 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Ed NOTE If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC TCS off e You turn OFF the ignition ESC will automatica
21. Power Window Switches There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect Touch the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the Key Fob Occupants particularly unattended children can be come entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may re sult in serious injury or death NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 AUTO Down Feature To close the window part way lift the window switch to The driver door power window switch and some model the first detent and release it when you want the window passenger door power window switches have an AUTO to stop down feature Press the window switch to the second i l NOTE detent release and the window will go down automati call e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto y closure it will reverse direction and then go back To open the window part way press the window switch down Remove the obstacle and use the windo
22. REEDE INTRODUCTION 44399358 9 659 54 n ER DR EI eae DR EN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 2 2200 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION CONTENTS W introduction EA AR N AE HD 4 W Vehicle Identification Number 6 B How To Use This Manual 4 W Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Mi Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION NEE Ed INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has
23. all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver s door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s door handle grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
24. e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing The capabilities of an ABS eguipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that include Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS and the Electronic Stability Control ESC All four of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving condi tions Also your vehicle is equipped with Hill Start Assist HSA Ready Alert Braking and Rain Brake Support Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau lic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake Syst
25. e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 If the cap is sealing properly the engine coo
26. 032433102 Brake Alert Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer The information it displays depends on ACC system status 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ACC or Cruise is highlighted in the EVIC Status of the ACC or Cruise is also displayed in the menu line Press and release the SELECT right arrow button to display the following information Adaptive Cruise Control Off When ACC is deactivated the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Off Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Ready ACC SET When ACC is set the set speed will display The set speed will continue to display in place of the odometer reading when changing the EVIC display while ACC is set NE 8 F WMLIZ The Light The Afters He Lives 032433431 Example Only NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC Display Warnings And Maintenance activity occurs which may include any of the following Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning e Set Speed Change The ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning wi
27. A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru LE ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the airbag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Infla tor Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the tim
28. DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the main menus and Ve hicle Info and Trip Info sub menus SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button to access 040909599 gt the information screens or sub menu screens of a main menu item Press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds to reset displayed selected features that can be reset EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 BACK Button Press the BACK button to return to the main BACK menu from an info screen or sub menu item Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays The EVIC display consists of four sections 1 The top line where compass direction and outside temperature are displayed 2 The main display area where the menus and pop up messages are displayed 3 The vehicle odometer line 4 The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom eter line The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categories e Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are
29. Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Seat Belt Pretensioner The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag must be replaced immediately 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seatbelts This feature is active
30. F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 NN IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 503 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 1 800 485 2001 The manufacturer will not
31. H To Resume Speed sy enes SE 33 9 e45 182 o To Vary Th Speed Setting 22 249 wm 182 E To Accelerate For Passing aksie a ea 183 176 W Adaptive Cruise Control ACC I EquipDeud 21 99 4E P FEE SU Rees MED O Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation H Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC EVI ACV ate Pm D To Set A Desired ACC Speed ss egest EDI Gane p44 44264 4555 AAR DR RES O To Turn Off O To Resume Speed B To Vary The Speed Setting O Setting The Following Distance In ACC D Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu H Display Warnings And Maintenance NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 O Precautions While Driving With ACC 199 W Parkview Rear Back Up Camera O General Information 203 If Equipped 1 ee ee nnn 217 E end With Touch Screen Radio m Cruise Control Mode 2224764405 da vs 208 EE EE o oe eee B Forward Collision Warning If Equipped 205 W Overhead Console ll Parksense Park Assist If Equipped 207 O Front Map Reading Lights 220 O Parksense Sensors 4 449 p45 e xs 208 15unglass Bin DOOF ese ee ee ee ree 220 O Parksense Warning Display 208 W Garage Door Opener If Equipped 221 D Parksense Display 209 Programming HomeLink 222 O Enabling And Disabling Parksense 212 O Gate Operator Canadian Programming 225 Using HomeLink 42544454048 2 bear
32. In turns or bends ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too late or too early This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly Give extra attention in curves and be ready to apply the brakes if necessary Be sure to select an appropriate speed while driving in curves ACC may occasionally provide braking and or a driver alert that you consider unnecessary This may be the system s response to signs guardrails and other station ary objects in a curve This may also occur at the base of steep hills This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service Using ACC On Hills When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor mance may be limited UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 system to take action ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane There will not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be atten tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary 2 d D A ET ed Lane Changing ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the ACC 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Narrow Vehicles Stationary Objects And Vehicles So
33. Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console NOTE The cupholde
34. System 8 4 Automatic Temperature Controls Soft keys Button Descriptions Applies To Both Hard keys And Soft keys 1 A C Button Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 Performing this function will cause the automatic opera tion to switch into manual mode and the AUTO indicator will turn off 2 Recirculation Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 3 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation The speeds can be selected using either hard heys or soft keys as follows Hard key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Soft key Uconnect Touch System 8 4 An indicator will illuminate when the rear window Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting turns off after 10 minutes Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar CAUTION area between the icons 4 Front Defrost Button F
35. TCS if can often be moved by a rocking motion Tum your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle equipped before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further information CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 419 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi
36. and handheld trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the handheld transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System Programming A Rolling Code System At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manuf
37. cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Firmly set the parking brake 2 Remove the rubber tray from the storage bin located to the right of the shift lever The override access port is near the bottom of the bin to the right of the shift lever gate 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position without starting the engine 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5 Using a screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position tab through the access port on the center con 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 8 Reinstall the rubber tray in the storage bin With Keyless Enter N Go If Equipped If the engine is running press the START STOP button to turn it off Release the brake pedal and press the START STOP button once or twice to go to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine Then follow the in structions shown above to activate the override 051210780 Shift Lever Override EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 421 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Towing Condition Wheels OFF the
38. e Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may dam age the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the airbag cushions are de signed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any Way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air bag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the out board side of the front seats e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag Label When the airbag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each airbag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left airbag only and a right side impact deploys the right airbag only 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC airbags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains
39. particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions Cooling System WARNING
40. sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not CAUTION be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable Failure to do so can result in the system not working to recognize every obstacle including small ob properly The ParkSense system might not detect an stacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de obstacle behind or in front of the fascia bumper or it tected or not detected at all Obstacles located could provide a false indication that an obstacle is above or below the sensors will not be detected behind or in front of the fascia bumper when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected When backing up it is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense e Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in the instrument cluster 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING WARNING Continued e Before using the ParkSense Park Assist System it e Drivers must be careful when backing up even when u
41. switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected outside the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically un locks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle NOTE The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the doors are locked using the door panel switch a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the vehicle and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected outside the vehicle The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true e The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE e The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the Passive Entry door handles e The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs e There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside the vehicle and within 5 ft 1 5 m of either Passive Entry door handle e Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors To Enter The Trunk With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the deck lid pres
42. touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Steering Directed Lights When this feature is selected the headlights turn relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel To make your selection touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Headlight Dip Traffic Changeover If Equipped Low beam headlights have more control of upward light and direct most of their light downward and either to the right for right had drive countries or to the left for left hand drive countries to provide safe forward visibility without excessive glare e Flash Headlights With Lock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Headlights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks soft key the
43. 70 Restraints Occupant 2 44245 e gib tant ER RAS AN 43 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck use 418 Rotation Tires gemewe eewceerduescceegexs 363 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle s 3 2 4 od WE as EDE 83 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 85 Dalely Werecis REPONN aie uiuunt Rp e 504 Safety Information Tire 222 eo Sk x 342 PAIGE JIPS ien doekies ERROR DER RA bdo qr Rd id 81 Dalely EXMAUSEGGAS sos REELE iria SEED eT Y cs 82 Schedule Maintenance SS 482 Seat Belt Maintenance su suet bie BERE ade P ES 461 peat Belt Reminder usos ds deber BROER EER eee 54 N INDEX 525 Seat Belts uoc duu hot ase ono 6 aw bee si 43 46 83 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 50 And PISSnanP WOMEN sant ooie ADRES ots 55 Child Restraint 000 70 71 72 78 PONOT si oed es a bea qd een pud dte 55 PROUE CCA 6 4 6 63444 eRe 299x309 8 7 55 46 47 OPO UON PP ee ye eng oe REEN 83 Operating Instructions o 12 3406 ER RR s 47 laisse rs ou wag EER REED ED eee ee Ge 53 REI eer rE EE ae ane ee 46 Untwisting Procedure se oy age nu ga mia dads 51 DOdIS La Ee AR ERR ee RERO P RACES RE ER 147 Xen spea n ss ee Ep Do de DRR 147 Easy Py Saw pe hee 3e 9 4 Pob udo dca d 161 Head Rest uod sos 99 men eae RE RR 153 an 2445 EA E EED HE pet EA ep OD es 150 Hei bEAdjasteient 3 odio 3 a dpR ECC REOR 147 MOMON i35 ES EE EE SEEK ER 4 157 POWEE A P 147 Rear olde weaker ERES PRAG CARES 156 Seatback Release
44. 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multi Displacement System MDS Re fer to Multi Displacement System in Starting and Operating for further information Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The g
45. BREER ED EED 08 421 ee rm 99 Recreational ua qx uobis 9 LEO UG Rd Bd 399 RARR SERE ETE ET HE SERE es 391 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome 399 Ti cttom Contool sis 445 ER RR Eu ooo ees 335 T TON ereer EERI ARE ae Di 387 Cooling System TIE sos ORE RAS PRED EES 299 olies TO Se ee ee oe ew T NES RES 390 Mirimum Requirements ss e cg keen 4 393 p o si BAR EL es ee AAR ee eee DE ne 398 Trailer and Tongue Weight 292 O P E EAEE Rd 396 Trailer Towing Guide srera doe TERA BREER DS 391 MUA DE sap Ed ana aes KOUD cane oa oa 391 die ode PME 455 ie AR ARE ER OE EE been oes 455 479 WIGIMENANCS 2 9 49 3 a Hs DES ee d 455 TASSO es oie 2 Ics Ew 3 8 ob es ders y Saxa 453 POMOC 44 4644 TESTS ETSTTSITET 316 319 453 ln P TE 479 kange Indicator o 23 nA rae Rob RE Bod LE 319 SNOG AE os qe ivt E oe S 316 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entity cris quA S es ook dees 23 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry iciecsisaeseneag oes 20 N INDEX 529 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 221 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 dans PONE Pets sus 23 veta teenies HIE MO 80 Tread Wear Indicators ss i 02 on o poe mn 359 Tap doele cues a hi a vota cb ea eee pura 254 Trunk Lid Deck Lid so EERS ELE ERROR RS 41 42 Trunk Release Remote Control 41 Trunk Release Emergency 6 22 sccheeune ime 42 TOP oudl ie oos oen Saw Vct weg s qe 167 253 DCE es ss sop
46. GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Indus try Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium Dut 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy 10 000 Ibs 4 540 Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Max Tongue Wt See Wt Note 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Re fer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information 392 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of
47. Ground RWD MODELS AWD MODELS Flat Tow IF Transmission is operable e Trans in NEUTRAL e 30 mph 48 km h max speed Wheel Lift e 15 mi 24 km max distance Trans in NEUTRAL Flatbed o AIL BEST METHOD OK Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN equipment designed for the purpose following equip position not the ACC position 2 ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed If the vehicle s battery is discharged see Shift Lever Override in What To Do In Emergencies for instruc tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK position for towing 422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION e Do not use sling type equipment when towing Damage to the fascia will occur When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to the front or rear suspension compo nents Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in
48. Lamp 472 H Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Died EQS pis oes ER a ep oe Deen Se 475 E License lamp ase ed OPS ERR eGo RSS 476 W Fluid Capacities 004 477 N Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 478 BEE MIE s ey od oueres RC Gee LARR ee 478 BEIASSIS MP 479 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 074438716 1 Integrated Power Module Fuses 5 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 6 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 4 Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L OI9 6 Q oO user 1 Integrated Power Module Fuses 5 Engine Oil Fill 2 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 6 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 4 Air Cleaner Filter 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems requ
49. MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer NN YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 505 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigatio
50. OND acides acp o6 ied ien dede B bod dd 341 TUS eek ee OE HEER BS EES 85 167 Vanity MITO 2 ia oe daal ni V 4 E eae eee d EE 98 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 253 N INDEX 521 boaginpg Velde prer tipten EY 2 FERA 385 387 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 256 429 ocn C 387 Manual Transmission 32 ue 945444 bora ee as 456 jj UC 348 Pud bevel Deck aouraeea qute es rag eq e 456 LOCKS AREA AE OR EE EN EE 28 Manual Service ER SEER ER Reyes 505 AMO UNOCK sinne Ede va 93944 s 31 Master Cylinder Brakes 26 24 00 trt as 452 Automatic Door x s ox ww 9e 9d e RR tts 30 Memory Feature Memory Seat 157 Chile PTOUOUDIE vus gia A P SEP RETE 92 MOMO EA oes Fang d qoem RR rai DES N 157 Dee p n EEN 28 Memory Seats and Radio 157 boet DOOR os sos 9v we ERE D OAV EE caus 29 Ne iss ER ode eee aep s VES E Ee 375 Low Tire Pressure System use 4 5 Sor kn aii 364 Mini Irip Computer ssscrscisescis essed oa ces 275 Lower Anchors and Tether for MIO P LL 94 Children LATCH sudor 424845 46e 64644 74 75 Automatic DINING s vate ex epas BERE SS ES 94 Ee oes le dese AREA N EERS OR RR 441 PICCIIC PON BEOd ire esrarR don actes mane oe a HER 96 Blechde RemOle soos yx vea deed SR RE 96 Maintenance Free Battery du ha dd GR ies om ia 437 Pxlernor Folding oi us ies ope bags maa grag EE d Maintenance Procedures ses ss 432 tcn UR 98 Maintenance Schedule io
51. On when the front radar sensor is blocked and requires cleaning the ACC FCW sensors require service or the ACC FCW system is unavailable because of a system error For further infor mation refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Low Fuel Telltale When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator 2 This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind ye shield washer fluid is low e Service AWD Telltale If Equipped This telltale is on when the All Wheel Drive feature requires service e ACC Malfunction Telltale If Equipped This telltale is on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is not operating and needs service EVIC Red Telltales This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include e Door Ajar This telltale turns on when one or more doors i are ajar The telltale will show which doors are e Oil Pressure Warning Telltale ajar Q57 This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked und
52. Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone simply touch the Mute button on the Phone main screen Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command per
53. Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 348 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location oy 5 LH RICS gages SPS A ROE Tett JTITCHERIWEETEEMVWIEILIISERV ER NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed 1 on the driver s side B Pillar 2 T125 70D15 3 420kPa 60PSI 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings G
54. Ricco oo EE 9d es 293 Uniform Tire Quality Grades sesse 507 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 293 Universal Transmitter sc o 2954 9 RE da 22 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 51 Vanity NONO 4s 2 sus soas ipeo beer a tata ga 98 Vehicle Certification Label eu RR 4045 385 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading x 23980993 5 HE KA RR ES 349 385 387 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vo Micle DONDE uoa ses Gas aye Aaa ee Pant 304 470 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Viscosity Eneme ON io ases a DRR da ER 434 435 Voice Recognition System VR 199 Warning Flasher Hazard on 6 6405 ois mer 402 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 253 Marines and Cautions sser sore oko qe 2 KAY mi 6 Warranty Information 4 504 Washer Adding Td os aas tea nies aoe e xy ox 443 Washers Windshield 173 443 Washing VENICE ses seer d 39 d OR ORE a PES 457 Water Devine TOER 244245 e052 PESE RR bees 326 Wheel and Wheel Trim soe od 20054454244 458 oT Id Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 458 Wind DULCHNE s 4 2 EE UR ORE OR rids 41 230 234 Widow OE ING cuoio Vas ARIE MR ERAS DOM 305 heo AN EE EE N bee Bees 38 POWER 2644032 oie Cod EES ee ae P S E A 38 Windshield Defroster 000 83 Windshield Washers 172 173 IJ T oe oe SP eae eo ee
55. Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Touch the Controls soft key then touch the Heated Steering Wheel soft key to turn on the heated steering Wheel Press the Heated Steering Wheel soft key a second time to
56. Starting And Operating for further information Keyless Ignition Node KIN This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Ignition Node KIN has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate NOTE In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch START STOP Oy 3 ENGINE Keyless Ignition Node KIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park Ing 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE mMm To
57. System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any airbag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the airbag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Airbag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with airbag system electrical components While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following o
58. Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 021337430 3 Remove the battery by turning the back cover over battery facing downward and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar then replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Indu
59. U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further information refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 8 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ies ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning li
60. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Pinch Protect Override Method 1 If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing of the sunroof or shade press the corresponding switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal motion ends After two seconds all closing motions will be manual and will have Pinch Protect disabled This will allow the sunroof or shade to move towards the closed position Method 2 If three consecutive sunroof or shade close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Pinch Protect Override Cancellation Once the sunroof or shade reaches the closed position Pinch Protect will reactivate In addition if any other switch is pressed which moves the sunroof or shade away from the closed position Pinch Protect will reactivate Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use
61. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision CARGO AREA FEATURES Trunk Mat If Equipped A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area The trunk mat is used to protect the interior of the trunk from mud snow and debris REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 CAUTION Failure to follow the
62. Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for rolling code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are having any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console 034134074
63. adjusted seat belt Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 WARNING Continued increase or decrease the lumbar support Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the support shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to Lo the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path 030934978 Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward or rearward to Power Lumbar Switch 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This Heated Seats If Eduipped On some models the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks edulis may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a The heated seats can be operated using the Uconnect seat that has been overheated could cause serious Touch System burns
64. an additional storage area To fold the rear seatback pull on the loops located on the upper seatback NOTE These loops can be tucked away when not in use Push Button NOTE The outboard head restraints are not adjustable Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for tether routing 030936862 M Rear Seatback Loop NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injuty The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint Folded Rear Seatback system When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED seatback above the seat strap This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position After releasing the seatback it can be folded forward
65. approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of indicators illuminated changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the LO level setting also turns OFF automatically after approximately 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes Ventilated Seats If Equipped On some models both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw air from the seat surface through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient tempera tures The ventilated seats can be operated using the Uconnect Touch System NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Front Ventilated Seat Operation Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch 4 3 Press the CLIMATE hard key to enter the climate control screen Press the Driver or Pass seat soft key once to select HI level ventilation Press the soft key a second time to select LO level ventilation Press the soft key a third time to shut off the seat ventilation Front Ventilated Seat Operation Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 Nav Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect Touch display Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level ventilation Press the soft key a second time t
66. are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should never install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts d 022636836 LATCH Anchorages Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s directions carefully when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with
67. back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Park Assist The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF To change the Park Assist status touch and release the OFF Sound Only or Sounds and Display button Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to ParkSense Rear Park Assist in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for sys tem function and operating information e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse When this feature is selected the outside sideview mir rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE VERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Blind Spot Alert When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monito
68. cause Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped damage to the engine control system It also could The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on e when the ignition switch is turned to the affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is ON RUN position It should go out with the required engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 12 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If E
69. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e Towing With HSA vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade ing uphill is in REVERSE gear when pulling a trailer HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when WARNING the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Continued 340 STARTING AND OPERATING NN ed WARNING Continued e HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting th
70. eee 168 Flashers Hazard Warning coi den SEE RD xem fe N 402 Tii IM da eder 2 exit we ER HES 85 167 253 Plat Dre Chan iig serris aoe ee Varie aos HAS 403 Flexible Fuel Vehicles CTUSING Range ii asie MEER ire HERE a 9 381 Field ovuauedecraqesieEC IPSE EE 381 Fuel Requirements ii ERG S DR go ae ea 379 380 Maintenance 2s Dei RR Bae sop E N dra 382 Replacement Parts sss unu DER AE EES EK 382 IE Kai OAAR ARIE OE ORE OAK 381 Flooded Engine Starting sea 4 244582 9S 315 Floor Console SS SS SE 242 AE GES ei SARON d oS YER ER 477 Fivid Leaks one he Ge econ ese heed Oe AE 85 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 454 Brake 24 6 6 inre oe eee Cees RA Ke HE 452 COONS OVSE patanas RR E hae betes 446 Exe II sis die 2093 209 9 4 149 ot Sates 433 Transfer Case 246 acorde Ue d 648440448055 455 Fluids Broke nli 3 w4 9 3a 2 53 342594 479 Fluids AE AAS eee EO OR AE AE EN 478 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 478 FOS bielie are oo aw AE he a ae 166 253 Folding Rear ocat ace 2 saos xp WP heritet EIER 156 Freeine A Stuck Vehicle sspe sucre ce han 418 POC MEI 374 Additives 662 544 EXC AA ard Bre ete ED 3 7 Clean Afr SS SS RR RI 375 CONSENS 2 xu eyed eh 93 ORE HER ER PTS E 272 Etanol 4445646466 6655 SER ORE AR De EE 375 Piller Cav Gas Cap TAS OS ERE TEES 258 Filler Door Gas Cap a soe EERDER PRAK ER E 258 N INDEX 517 Gasoline 24 8a boa Ooo eee eee tse os 374 So P 258
71. eee eee 156 pun PT E 147 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 447 478 Selection of Oil os eee ewes ees S 434 Sentry Key ImmobllZet sis ganse RE DR ds as 15 Sentry Key Programming us sad et bee HAD Ge 17 Sentry Key Replacement ua 2wesusesierej de 16 Service Assistance ss EES SS SS SS Se 501 Service Contract uos vies qp 9 y arae oe BS RE d 503 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator less Service Manuals 0 cee ee eee Seng Hie CIOCK uos sr Ries RR HAD APE Shift Lever Override 4 4 lt 6604 s4 84 6449 5 ENE Cr eee eee eee oe ia ee Automatic Transmission Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 526 INDEX NEE qc Shoulder Belts 22 222949 Ek REIYA 46 wies iio C RAD READ ee SE ME 65 Side View Mirror Ad ustmenE udo ues oe ERA ss 94 DIOS IUE iis 5 dos woes Y OR AR EE 85 167 253 Slippery Surfaces Driving On ss ida caeed aces 325 SmartBeams 4464 s o9 be R DDE SRO o3 ERU 165 Snow Chains Tire Chains 361 SNOW Ties 444 2540 4604440446 ARE RO EA 362 baie MIG ede pev Ewe Hd EED RIA 356 357 404 pat NS ora nr ce HA epp RD SARA 478 Specifications Fuel Gasoline xs dos 64046244 EER RED 4 4 374 478 Ol ER EES E EA Pees eee 478 Speed Control Cruise Control 180 184 DDGCCONGIGE sies ba AE Aa Pas Bri Re oe ie 258 SILAS iss r Aer HA HER SEA OASE DA PA ER 25 312 Automatic Transmission
72. factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your Satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual BATTERY CHARGING CO GLOW PLUG C3 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT STEERING FLUO G FAR URF SWITCH cr WA D vas DOME LIGHT e REEN PARK LIGHTS HEATED WINDSIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL V amp WANEISHIELD WIPER MOE ANBAG AND WAEHER E SRS b AIRBAG bm TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL ou TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTAANT SYSTEM ABC p cD e A dad TURN SIGNALS HEATED 1 DOOR LOCK mag ZO e D B M PONENOUTLEN UPPER AND LOWER HEATED SEAT AIR OUTLET GH MONITOR Z ad Dae 8 PROWT FOG LIGHT MOOD RELEASE OOMVERTIELE 4 WINDOW DOWN ETABILITY CONTROL Go Ka V UFTGATE RELEASE nErR T AMD VENTILATING FAN WAIDOW LOCK rn LOWER AIR OUTLET i G 4 di E AIR CONDITIONING M dece i aum amp LOWER ANCHORS BEAT BELT 0 ry AIRBAG SUDO 0009 EMERGENCY LIGNTE
73. following settings will be available e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlight With Lock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To make your selection touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing th
74. for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 483 e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in
75. fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling 384 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING 2 Remove the access cover located on the left side inner trim panel e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release Access Cover If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the fuel 3 Pull the release cable filler door emergency release 1 Open the trunk ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front zm Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear Release Cable EE E VEHICLE LOADING e Vehicle Identification Number The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the e Type of Vehicle Vehicle Certification Label This information should be Month Da
76. ieke ge ER Gees de ttu 482 OUISIO 425 4k eet LTD 94 Wanitenanice Genereer 424 s0oeee ee R Y EN EE RE ee eee EE FEES 98 522 INDEX NEE Id Mode Fuel Saver ee SUR ES 3 93 9 509 amp RRS d 272 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System sss 364 Mopar cio e DR PM EE ETE 431 504 MIBE ETBE x4 RR oan i riers EE Pe 375 Multi Displacement Engine System 329 Multi Function Control Lever 167 Navigation System uconnect gps 217 New Vehicle Break In Period 80 Occupant Restraints s sraa vae ar soo dee es 43 62 66 Occupant Restraints Sedan 59 60 62 65 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 478 Odometer EERS SO HER ER EE ER 254 Ol Chance Indicator ss wat a ROER RE 254 271 Oil Change Indicator Reset sis ies VR ses 254 271 Ed Filter Ela ee 46 2202 429095065 AE EWE ES 436 Oil Filter Selection x45 s 46n e542445 436 BIN rr 433 478 Capacity goo n eed Vaca Dae apa d SA 477 Change DHebVAl soeurs ae peba ee nas 271 434 ids sasie Saat RA DAE Gs AE ERA 433 Dist as sooo ses ER coe aaah wee RT 433 DispOsd saeeatecenne ages REGES RENS 436 Filer Gob teat tea ue cane 436 478 Piter Dispos s s steam aga wes yee a hae a 436 Identitteation LOBO sees x weed ae ces 434 Wihoterials Added IO se ee mag Horde ger ue DEE 435 Recommendation ens 434 477 sand e seks eae ee eae ee 435 JMIS
77. in order to reduce the possibility of burns Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injuries medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise par ticular care in order to prevent serious burn injury Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects when operated in the Heat position Rear Seat Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches Press the Cold symbol once to turn on the cupholder press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while Lighted Cupholders If Eguipped maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant s On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with elbows a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear passengers The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer Control Refer to Lights in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle for further information 3 035137960 Rear Seat Cupholders 035137958 Light Ring In Rear Cupholder 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE STORAGE Glovebox Storage The glovebox storage compartment is located on the passenger side of the in
78. in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas fo
79. instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in B WARNING the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and Wheel If Equipped The spare tire of your vehicle is equivalent in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 356 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN vehicle has an option for a spare tire matching original equipment tire and wheel refer to the recommended tire rotation pattern in Tire Rotation Recommendations in Starting and Operating for further information If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tem
80. into the USB port iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch User s Manual STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o clock positions f N wu 045035585 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM TAPE CD etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center
81. is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES CAUTION Continued The pages that follow contain the reguired maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your Your vehicle has
82. key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Audio After pressing the Audio soft key the following settings will be available e BalancelFade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 e Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch directly on the desired setting e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touch the Off 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Music Info Cleanup This feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation To make your selection touch the Music Info Cleanup soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer
83. lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Front Map Reading Lights Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either n side of the console These buttons are backlit for night do AE EH OE IE Over time visibility To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE is pressed J P a L3 1 2 w 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights 031433151 Front Map Reading Light Switches 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Ambient Light Interior Lights The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The interior lights come on when a door is opened feature This light casts illumination for improved visibil ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the
84. light switch m ul gt 033333449 Ambient Light NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Dimmer Controls Dimmer Switches The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the left dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights Rotating the right dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the door handle lights map pockets and cupholders if equipped Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer EVIC if equipped and radio when the park ing lights or headlights are on 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper and washer when the ignition is placed in the RUN operation or to the
85. not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up WARNING a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug internal injury in an accident The belt forces belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but accident across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Removing Slack From Belt 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to
86. nuts and tire 7 Mount the spare tire NOTE For vehicles equipped with a center cap do not attempt to install it on the compact spare However when reinstalling the road tire follow the procedure under Center Cap Installation If Equipped in place of the remaining steps in this procedure 8 Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 9 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 110 ft lb 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 11 Stow the jack tools and flat tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener WARNING e A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the
87. on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the airbag system whenever the ignition is in the START or ON RUN position If the ignition is in the OFF position or in the ACC position the airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi PN mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously
88. or shade switch press will stop the shade Closing Power Shade Express Press the shade switch forward for less than one second and release and the shade will automatically close then stop This is called Express Shade Close If the sunroof is not at the closed position and the shade is rearward of the middle position the shade will move to the middle position then stop If the sunroof is not at the closed position and the shade is at the middle position the sunroof will automatically move to the fully closed position before the shade begins Express Shade Close operation During Express Shade Close operation any sunroof switch press or shade switch press will stop the shade Sunroof And Power Shade Movement Manual If any sunroof or shade switch is pressed and held for more than one second the sunroof or shade movement will continue only as long as the switch is continuously held Whenever the switch is released any sunroof or shade movement will stop This allows the sunroof or shade to be stopped at any desired partially open position Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof or the shade during any close operation If an obstruction is detected the sunroof or shade will auto matically reverse direction to release the obstruction If this occurs remove the obstruction and then press the sunroof or shade switch forward to complete the desired close motion 234
89. remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020235340 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON engine not running a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF In addition to the chime the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster NOTE With the Uconnect Touch system the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the ignition in the ACC or RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause se
90. return to the previous menu e Fuel Saver Display In Cluster The ECO message is located in the instrument cluster display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Clock After pressing the Clock soft key the following settings will be available e Sync Time With GPS When in this display you may automatically have the radio set the time To change the Sync Time setting touch the Sync with GPS Time soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 e Set Time Hours When in this display you may adjust the hours The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the hours up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Set Time Minutes When in this display you may adjust the minutes The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the minutes up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the setting
91. setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e Hill Start Assist If Eguipped When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Lights After pressing the Lights soft key the following settings will be available e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30
92. shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the ignition in the ACC or RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment Normal Starting Using the ENGINE START STOP Button NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while press ing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then
93. sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any trans mission only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted If you notice fluid loss or transmission malfunction have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level CAUTION e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will re
94. six sensors located in the front bumper fascia to scan for obstacles up to 47 in 120 cm away from the front bumper fascia The warning display located above in the Instrument Cluster s EVIC provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object Service The ParkSense Park Assist System When the ParkSense Park Assist System is malfunction ing the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle The instrument cluster will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS message when any of the rear sensor s is blocked by snow mud or ice and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE or DRIVE The instrument cluster will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS message when any of the front sen sor s is blocked by snow mud or ice and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE or DRIVE The instrument cluster will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message when any of the rear or front sensors are damaged and require service When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE or DRIVE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE or DRIVE at speeds less than 11 mph 18 km h Under this condition ParkSense will not operate Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor
95. soft key to return to the previous menu e Units When in this display you may select to have the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings Io change the Voice Response 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Length touch the Brief or Detailed soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route To make your selection touch the Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to
96. space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Front And S
97. stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 504 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS
98. the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 CAUTION Continued e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be d
99. the SELECT button to display the following three trip fea tures in the next screen e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions or press the BACK button to return to the main menu The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the ON or START position Resetting A Trip Info Function To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions select the function you want to reset using the UP or DOWN buttons Push the SELECT button until the feature dis plays zero 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed Tire PSI Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Tire PSI is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT button and one of the following will be displayed e If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON e If one or more tires have low pressure Tire Pressure LOW is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON e If the Tire Pressure system requires service Service Tire Pressure System is displayed Tire PSI is an informatio
100. the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle e Personal Settings Linked To FOB If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed vehicle To make your selection touch the Memory Linked To FOB soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start After pressing the Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start soft key the following settings will be available e Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto On Driver HeatedlVentilated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this
101. the child restraint system e ls meets the seatback and are located just below the button with the anchorage symbol on the rear seat but are not visible You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it ln addition there are tether strap anchorages sy behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material Then rotate the tether anchor age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage be
102. the force if there is an accident Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can in crease the risk of injury in an accident Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers In addition the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column 022636842 Advanced Front Airbag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger 2 Knee Bolster Advanced Front Airbags 3 Supplement
103. the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof switches can be programmed to remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Opening either front door will cancel this feature N UNDERSTANDING THE FEAT
104. tire should be replaced Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death 360 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires eguiva lent to the originals in size guality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications o
105. to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets e Bi Level Mode gt Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets u NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets e Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets e Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window vel demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions e Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting and defogging When the defrost mode is selected the blower level may increase A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 NOTE For Manual Climate Controls while operating in other airflow modes than Defrost the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass 13 SYNC Press the Sync soft key to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Syn
106. turn the heated steering wheel off NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel and seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures espe cially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cush ion This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat ADJ USTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows the brake accelerator and clutch pedals if equipped to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat cushion side shield 032036861 Adjustable Pedals Switch Press the switch fo
107. wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 3 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 4 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 5 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 110 ft lb 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 6 For vehicles equipped with center caps install the center cap by hand Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the center cap 7 Stow the jack tools and spare tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener 414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING CAUTION A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve other booster source with a system voltage greater hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in tha
108. when it is on a jack 1 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic 2 If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle GEL Jack Warning Label WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409 81330194 060503826 Center Cap Removal Lug Nut Removal Installation 3 Before raising the vehicle use the lug wrench to 1 Tighten loosen but not remove the lug nuts on the wheel with 2 Loosen the flat tire Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange PEPPPRPRPPPP OSSE RAE RR PPR PRR DE 060536875 Rear Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire 060536874 Front Jacking Location NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug
109. whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seatbelts are fastened BeltAlert triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle speed over 5 mph 8 km h The reminder sequence lasts for 96 seconds or until the respective seatbelts are fas tened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Re minder Light remains illuminated until front belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seatbelts If a front seatbelt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will chime as a single notification and illumi nate the Seat Belt Reminder Light then will proceed to the 96 second reminder sequence The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert Programming NOTE Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend de activating the BeltAlert The BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps 1 With all doors closed and the ignition in any position except ON RUN or START buckle the driver
110. will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways However it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need
111. wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 Adding Washe
112. 00 km J Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter 1 Flush and replace the engine coolant if Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary not done at 60 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 494 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Odometer Reading Repair Order Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 120 000 miles 195 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s Replace the accessory drive belt s Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front axle fluid All Wheel Drive AWD Date D
113. 00 miles 78 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 488 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN ed 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 56 000 miles 91 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 489 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of
114. 3 WOES 4 5 oe EE Eb RA ORREL PEER 96 Rain Sensitive Wiper System esis rers ses NEE 174 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 200 G 4224544 EO RS aceon ee a ee Dede X 147 Rear Cupholder 524 INDEX NEE LLL ULLLA LULUOUU U GAOUI L LLI IU 1LALL coLLULILACALADUALLUILLLtItdi i LIUL0 0909 09 9BAAB LLLLILLOLE PLO S7ZA1 g L A Rear Park oie N EL sedeat i i er PR hs 207 Retreat Folding 2 423249 9934 b EERS 156 Rear Window Defroster ss SS SS Se 246 Rear Window Features sen 246 Recorder Event Data llle 69 Recreational LOWING ia ie RR Ue HERE HE 329 Reformulated Gasoline naaa aaa 375 ke iet apna ne dE OER AA deb APE EER 440 Release Hood 42422239 me Ek Rd WE 162 Reminder Diels On s gresco a de or ric Red 166 Reminder Seat Belt se uo Yrs 54 Remote Control DIANE SUSIGIIE sce edes eg ait oe EE FT a 25 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 43 5 xc RE 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 295 Remote Starting Systemi ss set s sosiaa matiis 25 Remote Trunk Release sss 4 Replacement BUIDE s aw 9 SARA RUMOR ES S RS 471 Replacement Keys ocn dd 301843 DEER HE HEEL 16 Replacement Pane 2432923299939 932 29 9 431 Replacement Ties 222 kr doe AE Pee fede wd 5 360 Reporting Safety Defects s a aces Es ARE SE 504 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 254271 Restraint Head uu xoa bis OE 40k RS ERR 153 Restraints Child leen
115. 401 372 STARTING AND OPERATING NN ed If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be moni
116. 442444 v qoe a 4 S PA 471 472 Daytime RUDNINE sae ke RED eee amp bode gos 166 Dimmer Switch Headlight 167 168 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 341 drca MEC PLE T Sawa ogo SYE 85 POO EER EE EE ES DI k 166 253 Hazard Warming Flasher iis sd DR SE a2 esas 402 Headight OW as se doo Sad AD ORE nga EE 163 HOS BEDS AR vitae ek EE ST weg ge 163 472 Headlights On Reminder 166 Headlights On With Wipers 164 174 Fue Bea 3 79 19 eO ERA REOR pees eke ees 168 High Beam dial soas oa gang et cee es 253 High Beam Low Beam Select 168 lid dinated EDS oct n wor dd Ee or pages a 20 Instrument Cl ster uu uu eec poses EE HE DER 163 Intensity CODO xs cesser as dpt ER E EE pis 171 CHOU PEE PP 170 ul rm 476 Load Leveling System 020 INDEX NEE NN NN iets On Reudep cs ve x es Su Re ERA HR ES 166 Leona ia oo PC M 267 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 256 Map Reading vos aon a eer v Rep 9 a o Rc do dh 169 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 171 Posse TAE TOE VEREER A 168 Reddo ssa need kis AR LERS RES DRANG 169 220 beat Dell REMINGE ies do ig owed ittd tirai 261 Security Alarm Theft Alarm is 26 ava sex se 2s 259 us RA RO Re AR oe AR ES 471 472 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 256 ODIOPIDOSTIS aca RR oe LLE SEE PRE SR RES 165 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 259 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 255 364 Tacto
117. 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 e Auto Dim High Beams If Eguipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection
118. 992 Fluid Check 41223224 SE odidi 452 479 Master Cyder siepe da RO bega qo ed 452 eis Pr an te he ee Pr Warn LiNE au igerte 9x R 9 RP Gees Drake TANGOS 3443626 Rek ER ed EE EIERS 1 9059 Brake Transmission Interlock 512 INDEX NEE Id DIOS SERE ER on 66 5445 99992 23 55 451 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 80 Brightness Interior Lights sis a bese des SE RS ss 171 Bulb Keplacement ss 02h e or 5 209 8 43 471 472 Bulbs E18 DE ss 54 bade os oe en aod AE RAS S 85 471 Camera Reat l0 END kee eR Oe BOROR AE 217 Capacities Fluid oes res Ge ieaie PARA oe i 477 Caps Filler il EP ie seed AEE A 434 435 Radiator Coolant Pressure 449 Car Washes RR ke d ex rem PA RAS AS ese ee 457 Carbon Monoxide Warning 82 378 Cargo Vehicle Loading 239 423 33 ER ues BEES ER 385 Cellular Phone 24 54 44 944 4 ace eae Ro died ae os 295 Certification Label ose eee ARE RR RE RAN 385 Chame HIE sie ooi OE tsrk DEE Ee REEDE 361 Clonee Flat Tre woo ERAS AR so ARE De De 403 Carp TE Ie ooo EER ER ORE EED ED 344 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 256 429 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 81 CHECKS ale e oe teat oh ARE ORE DRR AE 81 Child Restraint 2453 ore WER He AE 70 72 75 78 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 74 75 Child cate LOCKS ses aus ERROR DES au us 32 Clean Air Gasolin ia dope REK Rhe gres 375 Cleaning nA ia sans EEFE n Ma T 458 Windshield Wipe
119. AINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode injuring you Other time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
120. AR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below OF 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation 382 STARTING AND OPE RA
121. AWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 350 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4
122. And Wheel If Equipped ss sedes se 3 955 B Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 356 o Full Size Spare If Equipped 357 O Limited Use Spare If Equipped 357 EPIO Spinnin 1s iex e ae keke tee Ed Eu RR 358 o Tread Wear Indicators 4 ms 359 Elle IE sad EEUE bused sae RE 253 359 kes deed THES 4 ae 39v 9 99 25 e RE DS 360 W Tire Chains eee se 361 W Snow Tires SS SS ee 362 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 363 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 364 O Base System O Premium System If Equipped 369 E General Information sis ms 374 W Fuel Requirements llus 374 oO 3 6L Engine If Equipped es su ia xs 374 57 gt Enoine If EQuipped a vi os sep a sess 374 oO Reformulated Gasoline 375 310 STARTING AND OPERATING NN ed O Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 375 Et isi SE RINE 4445 2444 re errar 381 O E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 376 Ei Replacement Parts eis tus cae tence ue ts 382 ELIMI In Gasolin ass oe eee eee Rosas o7 Hy Min tenatde sees a eee EE EE RAD eee 4 382 D Materials Added To Fuel 377 Ma Adding Fuel cs ears ren Ee PEE 382 EL Fuel System Cautions lt a 60m 5 RAD 2 dedos od H Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release 384 oO Carbon Monoxide Warnings 2 5 N Vehicle Loading uos bud ER MR 6444404 385 ll Flexible Fuel 3 6L Engine Only O Vehicle Certification Label
123. Battery at an acceptable charge level 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e RKE PANIC button not pressed e System not disabled from previous remote start event Vehicle theft alarm not active Ignition in OFF state WARNING e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will
124. Bi D PL eae Cae eee eee aon 267 Materials Added lle o7 Methanol 2 20 55 dies 264 Morale eee aS os 375 Octane Kae oasis rert ii POR dco 478 Paver Mode aco gane dae NUR DERE a S RA 272 DDOCHICAHOHS sis ae KAAS EL PARE EO RE 478 dak CopdG yy secdeacvee chars oe ee3 999 477 Fuel OPHMIZET i sues acies sone oo noe ee ges aga 272 PUG GI is sep oa 6 bs oa DER ee ne 272 LI uel Flexible RE EE OE OE EE TEER N 379 Fuses SR TEL SEE ROER EIE EE N 462 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 221 Gasoline Fuel uxuesuees ka bem 4 Re ERROR as 374 Ri SE aes s Pee S RC EERSTE 272 Gasoline Clean Air eee 375 Gasoline Reformulated 9075 Gauges Coolant Temperatule 2222069 v3 o3 MR SE RE 261 buel iss ore E EDS OR HR es see eer DES ee 258 Speedometer feo debate hos Ses deos Or E EA 258 Tachomelet asse dup S RUFEN ea E dst a anita 253 ep c Rv rrr nnm 319 Gear Select Lever Override 3 cecus dace zs ar Epl 419 General Information 17 24 139 203 374 General Maintenance v aces o vare dees HER ooo 432 Glass Cleaning sase 9c oy be Hare SO OP Bad 4 460 Gross Axle Weight Rating sies ee temm 386 388 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 386 387 OVAR qq ER bas eee ee Fe Be eee 386 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water sess 326 Hazard Warning Flasher a ces 23629440549 RE 402 Head Restraints 518 INDEX NEE ed Head APE EE ON EE LR
125. C displays ACC e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position EVIC displays RUN e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC displays OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 If Engine Fails To Start Clearing a Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the brake pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and release the causing serious personal injury ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor Do not attempt to push N tow your vehicle to setit will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat could enter the catalytic converter and once the the Normal Starting procedure engine has started ignite and damage the converter and veh
126. C system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation a The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the ee Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF 342 STARTING AND OPERATING Synchronizing ESC If the power supply is interrupted battery 5 disconnected or discharged the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESC and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 U S DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded
127. CC HESYSL ET 2031 300 OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2010 Chrysler Group LLC N m C z O
128. CLE MA Call me TH call you later Thanks 5 6 7 Fm on my way 8 9 I ll be late 10 I will be number minutes late 11 See you in number minutes 12 Stuck in traffic 13 Start without me 14 Where are you 15 Are you there yet 16 I need directions 17 I m lost 18 See you later Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone OFF ON Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calling Uconnect Hands Free Calling The commands can be spoken from any screen after pushing the Uconnect Phone button Available commands while phone call is in progress The commands can be spoken from any screen while a call is active after pushing the pce voice command button Call John Smith Mobile 3 88 shows the number or i ing i Phonebook phonebook i Dial Tones phone j call list will screen will entry for John for 12344 dialed is phone is be shown Smith with all are sent redialed dial Dial Tones for numbers stored in Voicemail password are sent associ
129. COSIU cu xo Sas wd RP WS 434 435 477 Onboard Diagnostic System 0 429 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 221 Operating Precautions esr PRED 4 Pe 429 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors ois 6s EER RR 94 N INDEX 523 Overhead ons ole ik ER LS DEER eens boa yi N ETE EE EE EE 328 Overheating Engine x22 2 BERE HER 262 402 SUIG EER eyes hee KERSE eo 227291 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 505 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 177 sine n 20 4s oat EE ria FEE 38 VAM CONG POPE PLC hae ea as oS 496 Power Steering Fid 262299 Rees 479 FAMICOM oase ROER ays Paced we EER RE d 22 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 99 Park Sense System REAT ss ssri ee we cad etaeta 207 Preparation tor Jackie sssri x2 e prae ES DI 406 Parkine Drake oaa 86d R oe eee baa d ee 330 Pretensioners Passie DIE IE is oes de ce Ses E TV EIS VR 168 Peet DENS sue BE HEET OE EET 53 Pedals Adjdstable 4 asd en EE HOE PRE aware 179 Programming Transmitters I teas a oo ee eee IE OT N DOE 60 Remote Keyless ENUY oe pue ov te ke DE Pe 20 Placard Tire and Loading Information 348 Power Radial Tiy Ties ss saaana aa wan Fo RD a oe 355 Deck Lid Release 2442 his PEER eee des 41 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 449 Distribution Center Fuses 462465 Radio Operation 2 5 93 RP RE 295 Door DOKS AT 29 Radio Remote Controls 22 2 9 EE cues sisas 29
130. CW Status The FCW feature can be set to far set to near or turned off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The FCW Status Off Near or Far will be displayed in the Uconnect Touch display The default status of FCW is the Far setting this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time Changing the FCW status to the Near setting allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting which allows for a more dynamic driving experience Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you NOTE e In the Off setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the Uconnect Touch display e The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down e FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over head objects ground reflections objects not in the path of the car stationary objects that are far away oncom ing traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 e FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the u
131. Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5
132. E RE A 925 acciaio PP ee OPE RR HAS 326 N Driving Through Water 326 O Plowing Rising Water 2 siad doc mee aka s 326 O Shallow Standing Water 327 W Power Steering 000005 328 ll Multi Displacement System MDS If Equipped 5 7L Engine Only 329 l Parking Brake 0 330 Bl Anti Lock Brake System 992 N Electronic Brake Control System 334 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 334 H Traction Control System TCS 99D U Brake Assist System BAS sss eom nt 335 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 336 B Hill Start Assist HSA 338 H Ready Alert Braking si usd ex ad Res 340 E Rain Brake Support s 28444404 it ORR 340 O ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC Off Indicator Light 44 3 mx 341 OOA NONINO ESC sass ass Huang Sp Rd os 342 N Tire Safety Information 342 ED MEE ecc fom are d Que DRR Eater ded 342 O Tire Identification Number TIN 346 H Tire Terminology And Definitions 347 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 348 N Tires General Information 852 EV lite Diessi ui esos EE PRED N RES 392 oO Tire Inflation Pressures 4 mae a RR so sa cs 353 o Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 355 Hadid Ply Wes 24 05 6444 045 KORE eiis 355 O Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
133. EHICLE mMm refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety Your Instrument Panel for further information catch to the left The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel 818c748d Hood Safety Catch Use the hood prop rod if equipped to secure the hood in the open position 031336873 Hood Release Lever NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 CAUTION LIGHTS Headlight Switch To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to 9 The headlight switch is located on the left side of close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi i amp the instrument panel This switch controls the mately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should operation of the headlights parking lights instru secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless ment panel lights instrument panel light dimming inte the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged rior lights and fog lights WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death Headlight Swi
134. EPIS Td 4 462 N INDEX 519 MOr kolle seile EE bet ER te vr sess 170 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 19 ee es raices Em Jack DEo6dtioll 45 2 eie asie HOON wee bee S SER 404 Jack Ope HOM as sce uer ado og e 309 fX 9 ong ER 407 JACKING INGHUCHONS aas arster paren RS etta 407 JUMP SITING pi ncdadee4ne465024e0044544 414 Kev ii Reminder a5 care eae aan ah oe He 14 key A FOOTAIMINIIG acu sac T ieena dEn nry 17 Key Replacement uas ka EER REESE R3 y LS 16 Key Seni Tomo ZG ace o pacisci dees aas 19 keyless Enter NGO ii ec ues cd Sende rac ead 33 313 keyless Latry System 2455 n oe hi RAD DR DR a 20 heks Go crm 12 A cr 12 Kies Bolster A rr UPON EERS 56 Lane Change and Turn Signals 167 Lane Change ASSIS sos ego HIED See keane Rede 168 Lap shoulder DEMS ase mae pura tur DEER eh den 46 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 74 75 eaten Ate 224525 6ee dee eevee eee FEE 47 E WC wa gat eee ET OE EET ees ee 85 Hood uou ise Ghee mE LE AREA EE 162 Lead Free Gasoline e ee eee 374 Leaks Fluid 122 5 eens HOR re rur ee s 85 hie M TES sersa greeny r Oa oe Se oe ee OO 359 Lis Di BHlDS oa 25 2029 324 3 X92 BERE HOES 85 471 Pr 85 163 ide RA ua RS RE SE PRESE 63 69 83 259 Dico MT 299 ABUSE uaa SAD VRAE areas G44 4s 254 Atutomatie LIeadBghlls ii ska EER eee Fe es 164 Brake Assist WARE sis ees r eee eas oes 341 Brake Warning Bulb Replacement
135. F YOUR VEHICLE 115 You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio e Show Paired Phones or e Connect My Phone Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device Touch the Player soft key to begin Change the Source to Bluetooth Touch the Bluetooth soft key Touch the Add Device soft key NOTE If there is no device currently connected with the system a pop up will appear e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled audio device When prompted on the device enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range NOTE For devices which are not made a favorite the device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices e Show Paired Audio Devices 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Device Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority pa
136. Fan Relays ee Blue Red Fuse Spare 39 10 Amp Power Steering S Deme Natural 48 10 A ue Module Front m ron Lo me me NP S comet Fuse Spare Fuse Spare 20 Amp Vacuum Pump Yellow Fuse Spare 00 j Pme Spre Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel This center contains fuses and relays MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M EE CAUTION When installing the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Rear Power Distribution Center MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description Fuse Fuse RE pem Y ED p Yellow 3 Fuse Spae c ie 5 Lgs eee Yellow 12 0 Amp Cigar Lighters Instru EN a RU Pink Outlet Console Rear Lr Emp pene Green WAN El e Green Fuse Spare 30 Amp
137. Hon pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The
138. L into any forward gear when the engine is above WARNING idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot Remember to disconnect the engine block heater is firmly on the brake pedal cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal General Information The automatic transmission selects individual gears au tomatically dependent upon e Altitude e Vehicle loading e Driving style e Shift lever position e Accelerator position e Vehicle speed The gear shifting process is continuously adapted de pendent on the driving style the driving situation and the road characteristics NOTE e After selecting any driving position wait a moment to ra allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating especially when the engine is cold e f there is a need to restart the engine be sure to press the ENGINE START STOP button before restarting Transmission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the ignitio
139. LE CONTENTS N Engine Compartment 3 6L 427 N Engine Compartment 5 7L 428 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII_ 429 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance L EDOTOBIS s 4 oe bce tev acce aote dos DERE ear d 429 W Replacement Parts codec pues RET vd 431 W Dealer Service si EE es se A31 Bl Maintenance Procedures 432 BEREID i5ayaceu se ees chew T9 433 O Engine Ou Pitter san oec doe eg BEE 436 E Engine Air Cleaner Filter 914 ca es REED 436 O Maintenance Eree Battery vivas dar Rs 437 O Air Conditioner Maintenance 439 O A C Air Filler eee 0 Body Lubrication o Windshield Wiper Blades 442 o Adding Washer Fluid ilu 443 HLExhausb Systemi 14 934 SE 5 dea ink OR 443 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M El oone Sytem x23 d d S39 S PIER EAT S 446 APA c n LP rcc 451 D Automatic Transmission 453 o All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 455 Hd Read de sis ues DOK ERROR ware RR 3 A56 D Appearance Care And Protection From COMOSIOW 2050 ad pod eee ERA EIE OER KA 456 fuc ep 462 O Integrated Power Module 462 O Rear Power Distribution Center 465 W Vehicle Storage sanam sR READ EER DRS HOE 470 W Replacement Bulbs 471 W Bulb Replacement 4 472 O Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp Inner Park Lamp And Outer Park
140. Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi e mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 19 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level Th
141. Loading Information Placard 348 Tire Identification Number TIN 346 Tie Warnes resisti S edd qp ER Eu eee ess 342 diie Safety IMOLMMNANON s qx 43442 Ed ELE PERS 342 inc MT 85 352 507 Aging Lite of TIES ss ss pe ser Pei E Reo 359 AI PES UTE ia EA ere REN S Gare eee DRA 902 Gl RARR NE ET EET FR EE 361 di ie ART E 9 V2 50 EX OE ETE 403 407 COMPACT PAS AE SERE HEER DERDE EIS s 356 Flore CHANGING os 64 309 ages sen eres ee NS 403 General Information 004 252 Lol beed iis EE RED epa wed a 0 RE d 355 Inflation Pressures ss SS SE eee 399 ux EET HEES EE M 406 407 File Gr DIOS 2 ur 3 59 cow eee ee 9 2 Rd bees d 359 Load Capacity susse dea ine m he Es Ee 348 349 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 364 Pressure Varning Lieb 2243 9x 9 2003 255 Dial Gide au sua S ade T 234 PEOR 507 SI MPTT c mr 355 ISeDIgeell ell x92 299 SEERDE 5444 ase REN 360 DORDON 29503 99 309 S eet eae BAAR AE 363 Dale sabeuguuneoeene se aye anes EPI 342 352 DIZES 344 SNOW Ailes Ea ooie HAP caret ee S prod 362 pare TE gcc et ata guesehaeehanata res 404 OPIUM hae Soter qup 8 Sak hea ee ae 358 Trailer JOWME 22056 902 439 9 enh BEDR Fea s 395 Tread Wear Indicators a4 Aan IE eee has n Be 359 To Open HOO sis 646 246 te tire TERES 162 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 392 TOWING CETTE 387 belio a Motorhome G23 ie et desea d tinii 399 Disabled Velidle 4 s ue 3m
142. NING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident also need room to inflate Do not lean against the Some of the worst injuries happen when people are door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility Continued buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id of ejection and the risk of injury ca
143. Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline Materials Added to Fuel All gaso
144. OCK position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door E 021835329 Child Protection Door Lock Function Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged locked NOTE For emergency exit from the rear seats when the Child Protection Door Lock System is engaged manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position roll down the window and open the door using the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE u e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time e If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the theft alarm Grabbing The Driver s Door Handle NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed
145. OW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE e If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en I abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follow
146. Power Sunroof Switch 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and re
147. RE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems
148. RIVE If ParkSense is enabled at one of these shift lever positions the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle The six ParkSense sensors located in the front fascia bumper monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 47 in 120 cm from the front fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC
149. RK if you must leave the vehicle CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmis sion damage WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions 322 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id When freguent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode to select a lower gear Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the
150. S AND TETHER FOR t RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH A Ai KO il DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNERS TO DOWN TOP Uh MANUAL GO ELECTRONIC TERE ae BRA 2 BRAKE WIWOOW LIFT TIRE PHESSURE MALL OESCERT WARMING PARIONG CONTROL T ELECTRONIC ALL WHERL FA URE OF ANTHOCM ORIVE DAANG SYSTEM 4WD BRAKE GRAKE SYSTEM FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING DANE BRAKE Tow HAUL WA avo TOW WAL Ja A P FOUR WHEEL OMVE LOW AIC PUSH AIR ELECTRONIC CONDITIONEM Si es 010533317 INTRODUCTION 5 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN 010805185 N INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworth
151. T Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing zits the tire size two di ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 EE STARTING AND OPERATING 347 Tire Terminology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall
152. TER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator 2 AWD All Wheel Drive Indicator The AWD indicator will illuminate when All Wheel Drive AWD is activated 3 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park 0Q lights or headlights are turned on 4 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 5 Turn Signal Indicators Ca The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about 1 mile 1 6 km with the turn signals on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 6 High Beam Indicator ED This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 7 Odometer Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven
153. TING NN Id Replacement Parts ADDING FUEL Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch located in the driver s door map pocket CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance If you operate the vehicle using E 85 fuel follow the maintenance schedule section of this manual CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your 056837179 Fuel Filler Door Release Switch 2 Open the fuel filler door vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability Fuel Filler Door 3 There is no fuel filler cap A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system 4 Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling STARTING AND OPERATING 383 NOTE Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches allowing the flapper door to open 5 Fill the vehicle with fuel when the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 6 Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door NOTE A funnel is provided located in the trunk in the spare tire area to open the flapper door to allow for emergency refueling with a gas can CAUTION To avoid
154. The Uconnect Touch system uses a combination of soft and hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features Hard Keys Hard Keys are located below the Uconnect Touch system in the center of the instrument panel Soft Keys Soft Keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch display Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Settings Customer Programmable Features Press the More soft key then press the Settings soft key to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect Touch system allows you to access program mable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time ilh FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Settings Display Clock Safety amp Driving Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Uconnect Touch 8 4 Soft Keys When making a selection press the soft key to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been se lected Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow soft key to return to the previous menu o
155. URES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 COMMAND VIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER WARNING SHADE IF EQUIPPED WARNING The command view sunroof switch is located to the left e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in between the sun visors on the overhead console the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result The power shade switch is located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console E o HELTJE 034433149 Command View Sunroof and Power Shade Switches 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Opening Sunroof Express Press the sunroof switch rearward for less than one second and release and the sunroof glass will automati cally slide fully open from any position then stop This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any sunroof switch press or shade switch press will stop the sunroof If the shade is closed when the s
156. WARNING your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original eguipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire STARTING AND OPERATING 359 These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the
157. activated and it corresponds to an 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on volume will be reduced NOTE e Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio volume is reduced e If the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is re quested the radio is also muted Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used UCONNECT TOUCH 8 4 8 4 Nav Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Uconnect Phone supports t
158. acturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 2 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and releas
159. ailure to follow these cautions can cause damage to Press and release to change the current airflow setting to the heating elements Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea e Use care when washing the inside of the rear ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on to switch into manual mode The blower speed may the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the heating elements Labels can be peeled off the previous setting after soaking with warm water 5 Rear Defrost Button Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra Press and release this button to turn on the rear window sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 6 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for warmer temperature set tings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 7 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button
160. aiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the phone amp e button answer soft key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the EVR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 in progress Or you can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold During an active call touch the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen Only one call can be placed on hold at a time You can also press the amp button to toggle between the active and held phone call Confere
161. al Driver Side Knee Airbag NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC airbags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB to provide enhanced pro tection for an occupant during a side impact The Supple mental Seat Mounted Side Airbags are located in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized de
162. aler immediately Airbag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Instrument Panel Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Airbag Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Front and Side Impact Sensors Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the airbag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 WARNING Continued
163. amage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 10 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of I an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others CAUTION 11 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
164. amaged Continued 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued 394 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN id WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a and it will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Continued grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the
165. an autho rized dealership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster E FM 103 5 Fuel Economy ACC 200 km h 041035261 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e Radio Info Fuel Economy Info e Cruise Control Info Digital Vehicle Speed Trip Info e Tire Pressure Vehicle Info Messages Stored Warning Messages e Turn Menu OFF 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the UP button to scroll up wheel N ward through the main menu and Vehicle Info and Trip Info sub menus Fuel Economy Ve hicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages and sub menus
166. an start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn CAUTION e The catalytic converter requires the use of un odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Continued leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 CAUTION Continued e Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction
167. anel for further information e Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Daytime Running Lights DRL The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when ever the ignition is placed in the RUN position the headlights are off and the parking brake is off The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving NOTE The Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch 00 gt A n Fog Light Switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 O To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switc
168. anty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep Working With Automated Systems say Iowing Assistance This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can utilize the touch screen or press the EVR button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 ft you can press the Sve button and say Send 3 7 4 6 f Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can als
169. anufacturer sug gest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter All season tires satisfy this require ment and can be identified by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 363 Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefi
170. ard side of the seat near the floor 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly
171. are shown in bold face and are underlined in the green shaded boxes 030538628 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Uconnect Text Messaging The commands can be spoke from any schien ater pushing Te Leonard Phone buoi 12248555 lho John Smith Enter message from defined list provide by system or say List to hear all 18 defined messages Mona 1 You can replace John Smith wan ary name in your mob e or favorites phone book Vou can aho sny Send a message jo John mih and the system wal ask you which phone number you ig dre e ve 2 You can with Home Work er Other M with outgoing calls missed calls or missed calls work if tha Lconneci system is equipped with this feabune and tha suppeets massaging over BlueTooth mum replace 7248 555 12 12 with any phone number supporbed by your Mobile phone Ou can replaces 4 with any message number seem on The screen your phone does nol support phonebook download or call log download ower BT than these Ll sara AR odi ai ne Ee er ata Uconnect Text Messaging Reading Text Messages Tha commanda can be spoken when Tee fet message bee i MEAT bution Message text will be read aut ower the vehicle audio system Massage text will show up on the screen After the message text is read out the following commands are available automatically While the message text is displayed the following commands are available after pushin
172. aso 800d ab6 line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD 5 7L Engine If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufac turer recommends the use of 89 octane for RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformu
173. at setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter e Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch
174. ate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 144 000 miles 234 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 496 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 152 000 miles 247 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 497 t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner b
175. ated with entry is dialed Notes 1 You can replace John Smith with amy name in your mobile or favorites phone book You can also say Call John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to call for Jahn Smith 2 You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other 3 You can replace Incoming calle with oulgoing calls missed calls or all calls 4 You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone 5 These commands can be used during a phone call after pushing the connect voice command bulton insert talking head icon on the steering wheel Please nate the call will be mubed while ihe VR session is active 8 Send dial tones for automaned systems m available while a call is active 7 Stoning Dial lones in contact names is possible bul only the first number encountered in a contact name will be sent For example if there is a number stored in the Home and Work numbers for the contact Voicemail password only the Home number will be sent 8 If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over BT than these commands will retam a response mdicaling thal the contact does not exist in the phonebook 9 Emergency and Towing assistance ame contacts the have been pre loaded in the phonebooks Commands such as Call Emergency and Call towing assistance will call the comesponding number stoned woth those contacts Note Available Voice Commands
176. ather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 The most common causes are e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains R lt di i lation pde EE EE mu rauon and to protect your paint finish Take care never to e Stone and gravel impact scratch the paint e Insects tree sap and tar e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing aa h iminish the gl hi h e Salt in the air near seacoast localities oe ey ee ee Oe ou Ee ya finish e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing CAUTION e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with scratch metal and painted surfaces clear water e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu paint and decals lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super K
177. ation on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pres
178. aving the vehicle in this range you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise panel to ensure it is in the PARK position the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition light is turned from the OFF to the RUN position WARNING REVERSE Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the This range is used for moving the vehicle rearward parking brake Always apply parking brake fully Always stop before moving the shift lever to REVERSE when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 NEUTRAL This range is used when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PA
179. be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation 1 Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips Access Door 2 Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down and remove the used filter MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 072610692 n 072610693 3 Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the A C Air Filter direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper vehicle text and arrows on the filter will indicate this maintenance intervals Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be
180. been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of vehicle your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance maintenance schedule there are other components which components as the chemicals can damage your may require servicing or replacement in the future engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 Engine Oil Checking Oil Level 3 6L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading i
181. brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir Continued NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453 WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture Automatic Transmission Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis
182. c is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature Climate Control Functions A C Air Conditioning The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When the air conditioning system is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin For improved fuel economy press the A C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings NOTE e For Manual Climate Controls if the system is in Mix Floor or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Recirculation When outside air contains smoke odors or cv high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirc
183. ccurs have an authorized dealer ser vice the airbag system immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first cycled to the ON RUN position e The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were b
184. ced at Authorized Dealer Front Turn Signal Lamp PSY24WSV Front Park Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Daytime Running Lamp ses eim m m n LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Front Fog Lamp If Equipped H11 Front Sidemarker Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Tas Stop Tuin Lamp s oe uero sciet t LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Sidemarker Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer backup sets em DAD REESE RS E W21W Center High Mount Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer License W5W 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp Inner Park Lamp and Outer Park Lamp High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electro cution if not serviced properly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there i
185. circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire e Trunk Ajar Telltale This telltale is on when the trunk lid is ajar i e Electric Power Steering Malfunction This telltale is on when the Electric Power el Steering is not operating and needs service Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Due message will display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime has sounded at the start of each ignition that an oil change is due The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the
186. cle is being jacked Jacking And Changing A Tire WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your 3 Set the parking brake vee e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 4 Place the shift lever into PARK 5 Turn OFF the ignition the vehicle Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised 6 Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing Poon Por example if changing Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic the right front tire block the left rear transmission in PARK a manual transmission in ut cum wheel REVERSE jm i li il REF H jim o amm fh vii i N li if H l TT uu L att lt eee ee eee Continued 408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Continued e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle Do not get under the vehicle
187. commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear available commands press the Uconnect Voice Command vr button and say Help You will hear available commands for the screen displayed NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Natural Speech Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Push To Talk PTT button Uconnect Voice Commands The Uconnect Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are avail able at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect Voice Command eve button 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Changing the Volum
188. con are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature con dition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information STARTING AND OPERATING 329 NOTE e Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera tional it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers e f the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS IF EQUIPPED 5 7L ENGINE ONLY This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect 330 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operat
189. conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Uconnect Voice Command VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id If no command is spoken or recorded the system with say one of three responses e didn t understand e I didn t get that etc If a command is not spoken or recorded a second time the system will respond with an error and give some direction as what can be said based on the context you are in After three consecutive failures of a spoken command or recording the VR session with end Pressing the Uconnect Voice Command Svea button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can say a command This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel or Help These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your
190. connect Touch screen 5 When the pairing process has successfully completed e See step 4 to complete the process the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range 4 Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM Pair Additional Mobile Phones Touch the More soft key to begin Touch the Settings soft key Next touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Touch the Add Device soft key Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take pre cedence over other paired phones within range Bluetooth pairing successful Droid Incredible Make this phone the favorite 030536350 NOTE For phones which are not made a favorite the phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest phone paired will have the higher priority NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES O
191. d Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat Me P us Pulling Out The Lap Shoulder Belt Latch Plate THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will WARNING Continued e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will
192. d Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 346 STARTING AND OPERATING NN ed Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DO
193. d Vehicle Towing ee ed Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant Engine Oil Door Locks Door Locks Automatic Door Opener Garage Driving On Slippery Surfaces Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy E 85 Fuel Electric Rear Window Defrost Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Brake Control System Anti Lock Brake System Brake Assist System Tachon Control Systemi 4p 43k EERLIKE Electronic Power Distribution Center Fuses 462 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 180 184 Electronic Stability Control ESC 336 Electronic Vehicle Information Center BUE oo sca don soa ate RR OR gue ones 217 262 Emergency Deck Lid Release sisie tab EER 42 Emergency Trunk Release 6144442 25 4 220455 42 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck es ark reed 418 Hazard Warning Flasher os vu o orem sre tsen 402 Jack 59x 322 58 CR E REIS AE RE OAR 403 Jomp EED sie estos teats En ass Rd 414 Cveiedne tang EES X LAERE AR Sud BE LE 402 ion AE ES EE EE teat eee near 421 Emission Control System Maintenance 429 ie AE EO ET EE DT 428 sel TE EE 5 4 53464544595 ous 436 Plock FISa vase den Pbi ERE SERA S 316 N INDEX 515 Break In Recommendations 80 Checking Oit Level sis oe RR RE ingerii 433 oper ELE ss oor eee esta ed oa SA 427 428 Compartment Identification 427 Coolant Antifreeze
194. d below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone e Redial e Dial by touching in the number e Voice Command Dial Digital Contact Redial or Call Back e Favorite Phonebook 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA e Mobile Phonebook e Recent Call Log e SMS Message Viewer NOTE All of the above operations except Redial can be done with 1 call or less active Dial By Saying A Number e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Dial 248 555 1212 e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number 248 555 1212 Call By Saying A Name e Press the amp button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call John Doe Mobile e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe Call Controls The touch screen allows you to control the following call features e Answer e End e Ignore Hold unhold Mute unmute NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 e Transfer the call to from the phone Recent Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types e Conference join 2 active calls together 68 ad FM 91 7 ETE Eds Ww 72 e Swap 2 active calls Touch Tone Number Entry Recent calls gt All Cal x A e Touch the Phone soft key Ana Conda Axel Schweiss
195. d speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed
196. depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go e When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position e When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver seat will move to a position 0 3 in 7 7 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0 9 in and 2 7 in 22 7 mm and 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position e The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Basy Entry Easy Exit feature can be en abled or disabled using the Uconnect Touch System 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR V
197. deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side 022636832 Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Label Location NOTE e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment e Being too close to the side airbags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the side airbags during impacts that require airbag occupant protection WARNING e Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should re main free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag provides enhanced protection and works together with the Driver Advanced Front Airbag during a frontal impact Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbags Along with seat belts and
198. dition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Settings 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity The rain sense wipers will automatically change between an intermittent wipe slow wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 moisture that is sensed on the windshield Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Unders
199. dly burned by hot engine supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If from the engine cooling system you see or hear steam coming from under the hood tAUHON do not open the hood until the radiator has had time CAUTION to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure Driving with a hot cooling system could damage cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with J ACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued 404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Continued J ack Location Spare Tire Stowage e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You Cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack could be crushed Never put any part of your body and spare tire under a vehicle that is on a jack NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to Never star
200. due to the increased surface temperature of WARNING eee CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex heating element and or degrade the material of the seat haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Front Heated Seat Operation Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch 4 3 Continued Press the CLIMATE hard key to enter the climate control screen Press the Driver or Pass seat soft key once 4y to select HI level heating Press the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF Front Heated Seat Operations Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch 8 4 and 8 4 Nav Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect Touch display Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level heating Press the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 When the HI level setting i
201. e Driver Center CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor 022636908 To attach a child restraint tether strap 1 R h h hoe behind ih Tether Strap Mounting Kotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the Er TN ie suas ioe seat where you are placing the child restraint 3 Attaching Strap aa ncaa se 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long b
202. e 030436523 Automatic Dimming Mirror NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror The mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts NOTE This feature is also available on the passenger s side when equipped with turn signal and approach lighting Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach Lighting If Equipped Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal and approach lighting contain four LEDs which are located in the upper outer corner of each mirror Three
203. e cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Place the ignition in the RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink
204. e Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MMM downloaded names can be used Until then if avail 2 After loading the mobile phonebook select phone able the previous downloaded phonebook is available book from the Phone main screen then select the appro for use priate number Touch the next to the selected number to e Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile sp ay the options pop up In the pop up select Add to phone is accessible l l 68 44 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Wwb 72 e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or E deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and u
205. e it takes to blink your eyes The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag unit is lo cated in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbag it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the airbag to inflate to the full size The airbag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of airbag NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the
206. e 2 443 Windshield Wiper Blades 442 Windshield Wipers one uses REK EE NM 172 Wiper Blade Replacement 45 2 docs uico fed a abs 442 Wipers Inferm ttent ses os o sara eR ES 173 Wipers Bain Sensive aea durs d gue meg b oa ws 174 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for poss
207. e BAS is deactivated 336 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN ed WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering whee
208. e Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed Voice Response Length e Touch the More soft key then touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Display soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length e Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to show your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength and phone battery strength Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress
209. e Starting Voice Recognition VR Session in Radio Player Modes 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command In this mode you can say the following commands SVR button NOTE The commands can be said on any screen when a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect Voice 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Command vr button volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command Disc system is speaking Please note the volume setting for EE EE Dia Voice Command is different than the audio system DE This command can be given in any mode or screen 2 Say a command e g Help e Track to change the track UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Voice Tree Uconnect Voice Command AM FM Satellite Radio available commands These commands can be spoken when the AM FM or Satellite radio is playing after pushing the Uconnect voice command button Commands only available Commands available in Commands only available in AM FM mode mode in Satellite mode 3 Audio will Audio will Audio will Audio will Audio will change to 950 change to the change to the change to change to AM AM or FM next Satellite Satellite station Satellite frequency or Rock Stations 80 s on 8 Channel 8 Satellite Channel stored in preset 5 Notes 1 You can replace 950 AM with any other AM or FM frequency such as 98 7 FM 2 You can replace Rock with any of the satellite music type
210. e is selected Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control buttons located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the ACC system s RES ONOFF ma anaal aar CANCEL SET 1 DISTANCE SETTING 2 RES 3 SET 4 CANCEL 5 ON OFF 6 MODE NOTE Any chassis suspension modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC To Activate You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above Push and release the ON OFF button The ACC menu in 20 mph 32 km h the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Ready When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC dis plays Adaptive Cruise Ready When the system is OFF the EVIC displays Adaptive Adaptive Cruise Control Off Cruise Control NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following Ready conditions e When you apply the brakes 96789 mi ls e When the parking brake is set e When the automatic transmission is in PARK RE Adaptive Cruise Control Ready VERSE or NEUTRAL To turn the system OFF push and release the ON OFF button again At this time the system will turn off and Wh hing the RES butt thout 8 j y ant de Ee TT a prEVIouS Y ne EVIC will display Adaptive Cruise Control Off 032433097 WARNING
211. e light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 20 O D Overdr
212. e to de crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h NOTE e When you use the SET button to decelerate if the engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle e The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop e The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending down hill This is normal operation and necessary to main tain set speed 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between 3 long 2 me dium and 1 short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the EVIC ACC 55 mph DISTANCE 3 032433101 Distance Set To change the distance setting press the Distance button and release Each time the button is pr
213. e transmission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll down the hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Ready Alert Braking Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver When the throttle is released very quickly Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes Rain Brake Support Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors It only functions when the windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode it does not function in the intermittent mode When Rain Brake Support is active there is no notificati
214. ead In addition the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle to vehicle distance is detected Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is selected To Set A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed In the normal Cruise Control mode the system will 3 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE You must observe the display when setting or changing speed not the speedometer To Vary The Speed Setting There are two ways to change the set speed e Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the desired speed and press the SET button e Tap the RES or SET button to increase or decrease the set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments respec tively Hold the RES or SET button for 5 mph 8 km h increments To Cancel The system will disable normal Cruise Control without erasing the memory if e You softly tap or depress the brake pedal e You press the CANCEL button e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates To Resume Press the RES button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed To Turn Off The system will turn off a
215. ead life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light NS TAK TING AND OPERATING 367 e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure M
216. ealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 128 000 Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a d Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 128 000 miles 208 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing AII Wheel Drive AWD Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 495 144 000 Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 136 000 miles 221 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Hd Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rot
217. ear impact If the AHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized deal immediately To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Rear Head Restraints ders The center head restraint has two positions up or down When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint 030907490 should be in the raised position When there are no Push Button occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by lowered for maximum visibility for the driver qualified technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Folding Rear Seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide
218. ect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone amp Button is used to p recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When you press the button you will get into the phone mode and make calls show hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command t amp vR Button t VR is only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call The ve button is also used to access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command features if your vehicle is equipped Please see the Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how to use the Sv button The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts There a
219. ed in the menu line also Press and release the SELECT right arrow button to display the following information e If equipped with ACC one of several messages will be displayed giving a dynamic update of the status of the feature as the driver changes feature status or follow ing conditions change If ACC is active and a warning or other feature is in the EVIC main display the ACC status will be displayed in place of the EVIC odometer line e For vehicles with Cruise one of several messages will be displayed giving a dynamic update of the status of the feature as the driver changes feature status or conditions change If Cruise is active and a warning or other feature is in the EVIC main display the Cruise status will be displayed in place of the EVIC odometer line Press and release the BACK button to return to the main menu Vehicle S peed Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Speed is highlighted in the EVIC Press the SELECT button to view a digital display of the current speed in mph or km h Pressing the SELECT button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km h Press the BACK button to return to the main menu NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 NOTE Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC Trip Info Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Trip Info is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release
220. ed parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage EG Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 NOTE WARNING e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound the parking brake Always apply the parking to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle before attempting to move the vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front seriously or fatally injured wheels toward the curb od downhill grade and Ad Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking child could operate power w
221. ee FEE 153 Headlielit Waster 16 92 93293949 4 54 a4 RRE 443 Lie dil Dm 472 Automatic ras sk oe hee hehehe neta eee 164 Bulb Replacement scars a st a RE ae baw d 9c 472 acr 460 Delay ums atem PEE SR E SR IUS os 164 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 168 Shi On Reminder sa oa oe ve vx fe aes te os 166 On With Wipers 42 5 aao ater s rion ode SCR 164 174 Ecc A rc TET 168 DVO A244 oy Sarhs AER IUe ARE ER DER HD es 163 diie DC PE 164 ESELS goes ku ES RE BERE T TT 443 Heated Mirrors SS SS SS eee eee ees 98 sl sees AAR AE OO FO ese 6 3 150 Heater Engine Block x RSS TAS 316 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 168 Hill Start Assist sese d eoe ek amp ORR ER 338 Hitches Taller TOWING 424 sacs dni ets baute beds 4 390 Holdet COM ouk acra wae A u s AE OE ES Ru RS 242 Holder C U esee oe bu ROS Rd ae ene DOER ORA 239 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 221 Hood Release cas scare d o lc RPO DE GeO d 162 Ignition METODE TEE EE OIE EERS 12 Ik minated EUY se n cree dae Bord eg ie S den eA 20 Immobilizer Sentby Key saceuds spe DEEG coe se 15 Infant Restraint ao 23 18 ERRARE EY GAP SS Ys 70 71 Information Center Vehicle LL 262 Itisttrument CWister ss dw cee bates gatas SE 09 5 253 Instrument Panel and Controls 251 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 461 Integrated Power Module Fuses 462 InienorJAppearante Care i c RTI RAS 459 MEGO 0569 a3 weed Su AUTE RIORIY
222. eed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Two Wheel Drive and All Wheel Drive Recreational towing with all four wheels on the ground or using a tow dolly is NOT ALLOWED The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle behind an other vehicle is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flashers 402 B If Your Engine Overheats 402 N Jacking And Tire Changing 403 O Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage 404 O Preparations For Jacking 2 n 406 0 Jacking And Changing A Tire 407 OC ompacl opare Tie si oa Ra RA Rd A12 B Center Cap Installation If Equipped 413 ll Jump Starting Procedures O Preparations For Jump Start D Jump Starting Procedure N Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ll Shift Lever Override o With Keyless Enter N Go If Equipped 420 Mi Towing A Disabled Vehicle 421 O Without The Ignition Key 423 402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel between the center air outlets Press the s
223. eel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn ON 3 Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn off the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn ON 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the LOW TIRE message will turn off and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will
224. een the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you NS TAK TING AND OPERATING 327 Shallow Standing Water CAUTION Continued Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing wat
225. eflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather This system can be operated through either the Automatic Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect Touch system display When the Uconnect Touch system is in different modes Radio Player Settings More etc the driver and pas senger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display General Overview Hard Keys The hard keys are located below the Uconnect Touch screen in the center of the instrument panel Automatic Climate Controls Hard keys Soft Keys Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch system screen Uconnect Touch
226. elltale warns of an overheated engine condi see tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this telltale will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the telltale will continuously flash and a continu ous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME If the telltale turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale This telltale indicates that the transmission F fluid temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this telltale turns on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEU TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Telltale illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some
227. em in Starting and Operating for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability Brake Assist System BAS This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma neuvers This system detects an emergency braking situ ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released th
228. em is OFF e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle e l ress LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open e Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion e Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 3 If any doors are open close them To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods e Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter e Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if equipped refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 e Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position NOTE e The driver s door key cyli
229. enger doors To disable the window controls press and release the window lockout button setting it in the DOWN position To enable the window controls press and release the window lockout button again setting it in the UP position 021935321 Window Lockout Switch NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice within five seconds Blacafd7 Trunk Release Button With the ignition in the ON RUN position the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trun
230. entually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Continued vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 CUPHOLDERS 2 Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the M center console 035135226 Front Cupholders 035135225 Retractable Cover 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Heated and Cooled Cupholders If Equipped Press the Hot symbol once to activate the cupholder Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder cupholders The cupholders are designed to help keep warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool WARNING When using the cupholder in the Heat position avoid contact with the heated portion of the cup holder
231. er e Driving through standing water may cause dam age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 328 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id OO WARNING dk dioi WARNING Your vehicle is equipped with an electro hydraulic power e Driving through standing water limits your vehi steering system that will give you good vehicle response cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces 8 km h whe
232. er the hood e Charging System Telltale This telltale shows the status of the electrical charging system If the telltale stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system telltale remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Telltale This telltale informs you of a problem with the y Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If the telltale comes on while driving have the sys tem checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the telltale will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The telltale should turn off If the telltale remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the telltale is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Telltale E This t
233. erature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature If the transmission exceeds normal operating temperature the transmission will ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 change the way it shifts to help control the condition This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the DRIVE position After the transmission cools down it will return to normal operation Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition light is in the OFF position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition light must be turned to the RUN position by pressing the ENGINE START STOP button once or twice engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Five Speed Automatic Transmission Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears Shift Lever Gear Ranges PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range 320 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN ed Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply The following indicators should be used to ensure that the parking brake when le
234. erious injury or death mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 Turning ParkView On Or Off OVERHEAD CONSOLE With Touch Screen Radio The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights Turn the Radio on and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door l l Opener HomeLink power liftgate and power sunroof Press the More soft key switches may also be included if eguipped Press the Settings soft key l X Press the check box soft key next to Parkview 1 2 3 4 Press the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key 5 Backup Camera to enable disable 033333450 Overhead Console 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Front Map Reading Lights Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility a Tl 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pressed Sunglass Bin Door At the front of the console a compart
235. esigned to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury Continued 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Always make sure that floor mats are properly e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the attached to the floor mat fasteners Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Continued driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to pr
236. essed the distance setting adjusts between long medium and short If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indi cator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until e The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed e The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor e The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph 24 km h and the system automatically disengages itself NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 e The distance setting is changed e The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Activation The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead w S
237. ethanol Fuel system damage or vehicle vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine performance problems resulting from the use of running for more than a short period adjust the such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the manufacturer the vehicle Continued NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 379 WARNING Continued CAUTION e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected Si ie wat operate on E 85 every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique B fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un 81264629 leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles E 85 Badge 380 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN ed Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 is a mixture of ap
238. feature as required by federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC mes sage states CHANNELS CLEARED It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training 1 Place the ignition in the RUN position NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 2 Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink
239. feature is selected the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C When tempera tures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn on To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options soft key the fol lowing settings will be available NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 e Easy Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Off Delay When this feature i
240. flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure 370 STARTING AND OPERATING The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pres
241. g the amp or vr buttons while the system is playing is known as Barging In refer to Barge In Overriding Prompts for further information Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owners Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing NOTE e You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure e The vehicle must be in Park 1 Press the Phone soft key on the screen to begin 2 If there is no phone currently connected with the system a pop up will appear GES FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out We 72 No phone connected Would you like to pair a phone 030536349 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 3 Select Yes to begin the pairing process Then search Ree 10 10 NW 54 out W 72 for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile E FFA phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen Bluetooth pairing in progress Please wait e If No is selected touch the settings soft key from the Uconnect Phone main screen e Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the U
242. g the phone VR bution eit talks head oe Massage text Enter message from Numbe will be read out defined list provide by Msc over the system or say List to esae ls vehicle audio hear all 18 defined m system sae ges Enter in contact name and phone type Note Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and are underlined in the green shaded boxes 030536630 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation UCONNECT VOICE COMMAND 8 4 8 4 Nav Uconnect Voice Command System Operation N The Uconnect Voice Command system al t VR lows you to control your AM FM radio satel lite radio disc player SD Card USB iPod and Sirius Travel Link NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving
243. ght is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 9 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substi
244. h An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective A Turn Signal On message will appear in the EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction
245. hange the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 96 000 miles 156 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 3 6L Engine Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the transfer case fluid All Wheel Drive AWD O C O O O O C C O L LLE Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 493 104 000 Miles 169 000 km or 112 000 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 112 000 miles 182 0
246. he ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion 338 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN ed WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 676 approximate grade or greater hill
247. he following features e Searching Contacts phone number Search for John Voice Activated Features Smith Mobile e Hands Free dialing via Voice Call John Smiths Mo Screen Activated Features bile or Dial 248 555 1212 e Dialing via Keypad using touch screen e Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming e Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis mm SMS messages played on the touch screen e Hands Free text messaging Send a message to John e Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are Smiths Mobile easily accessible on the Main Phone screen e Redialing last dialed numbers Redial e Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs e Calling Back the last incoming call number Call e Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Back ack e Sending a text message via the touch screen e View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show Recent Calls e Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touch screen e Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA NOTE Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect P
248. he front NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than o
249. he rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window Your vehicle has Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC or Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB and deployment occurs the SABIC and SAB airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING Continued e In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly WAR
250. he shift lever to the right D for a few seconds You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD IF EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with an active on demand All Wheel Drive AWD system which makes available optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and driving conditions The system minimizes wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear wheels as necessary To maximize fuel economy your AWD vehicle automati cally defaults to rear wheel drive RWD when road and environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is unlikely to occur When specific road and environmental conditions require increased levels of road traction the vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside tempera ture wheel slip or other predetermined conditions there may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel slip condition occurs AWD can also be manually se lected by moving the shift lever into the AutoStick mode or activating the windshield wipers for an extended ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 period of time Drive mode RWD or AWD is displayed momentarily in the Electron
251. he vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situa tions Operation When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between the five available gears To engage AutoStick simply move the shift lever to the right or left D D while in the DRIVE position When AutoStick is active the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will only shift up and down when right or left is manually selected by the driver or as described below It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen Fully pressing the accelerator pedal while in Autostick mode will downshift the transmission as needed for maximum acceleration 3 6L Models Only 324 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear Tapping the shift lever to the D position at a stop will allow starting in second gear After a stop the driver should manually upshift D the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated To disengage AutoStick mode hold t
252. her information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is cycled from the OFF position NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit ter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021335339 Key Fob With RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to
253. hicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Blind Spot Alert When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn signal is then
254. hone For Uconnect customer support call For Chrysler vehicles call 1 800 247 9753 e For Dodge vehicles call 1 800 423 6343 e For Jeep vehicles call 1 877 426 5337 e For Ram Truck vehicles call 1 866 726 4636 For a list of compatible phones see the Uconnect websites e www chrysler com crossbrand uconnect chrysler interface html e www chrysler com crossbrand uconnect dodge interface html e www chrysler com crossbrand uconnect jeep interface html Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other with out wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconn
255. ible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems CHRYSLER SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 11C481 126 AB Second Edition Printed in U S A
256. ic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the gage area of the vehicle display when the transmission is first shifted into gear and if the drive mode changes during vehicle operation NOTE If the t CASE or SERVICE AWD SYSTEM warning message appears after engine start up or during driving it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly and that service is required Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information CAUTION All wheels must have the same size and type tires Unequal tire sizes must not be used Unequal tire size may cause failure of the front differential and or the transfer case DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc 326 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN ed Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up betw
257. icking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h eee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti Lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations and e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING e The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip ment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capa bility Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued 334 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id WARNING Continued
258. icle If the vehicle has a discharged battery After Starting booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will booster battery or the battery in another vehicle decrease as the engine warms up This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergencies for further information e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire 316 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EOUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that a complete stop is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the Module vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one is at idle speed hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRA
259. ict the lane curvature or the move ment of preceding vehicles and will not compensate for such changes e When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet heavy traffic and complex driving situations e g in highway construction zones When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp when driving on roads that are winding icy snow covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill slopes When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings Can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The Cruise Control system has two control modes e Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles e Normal fixed speed cruise control mode is for cruis ing at a constant preset speed For additional informa tion refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section NOTE The system will not react to preceding vehicles Always be aware of the mode selected You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons The two control modes function differently Always confirm which mod
260. ide offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements 390 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN ed WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in a collision e Weight distributing systems may not be compat ible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec reational vehicle dealer for additional information Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory eguipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 lbs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum
261. ide Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power until the ignition key is re moved or the ignition switch is changed to OFF using the Keyless Go Start Stop button e Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are no
262. indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Fuel Economy is highlighted Press the SELECT button and the next screen will display the following e Average Fuel Economy Miles Per Gallon MPG Bar graph e Distance To Empty DTE e Miles Per Gallon MPG Press the SELECT button to reset the Average Fuel Economy Press the BACK button to return to the main menu Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When Average Fuel Economy is selected The word RESET gt with right arrow appears next to it Pressing the right arrow button will reset Average Fuel Economy which displays 0 immediately after reset Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset There is an ECO icon between the Compass and Outside Temperature info at the top of the EVIC display This icon will appear whenever MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 N ter Fuel Economy AVG 99 9 RESET UTE LOW FUEL MPG 10 20 ami 041009379 Fuel Saver Mode On This feature allows you to monitor when yo
263. indows other con brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise trols or move the vehicle the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Continued 332 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN WARNING Continued e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Continued ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight cl
264. ine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 16 000 miles 26 000 km 7 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 8 000 miles 13 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 486 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 32 000 miles 52 000 km L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the engine air cleaner filter i
265. iness and safety and may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS HA Word About Your Keys 12 O Keyless Ignition Node Kin 12 Elk os BOB sio ye Shee x RESP Pu S DER De 13 H Ignition Or Accessory On Message 14 NM Sentry Key EE EE OR N 15 E Replacement Keys 2 2 2644 RS RTT ES 16 O Customer Key Programming 17 O General Information 222 c9 be rege 17 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped O Rearming Of The System o To Arm The System o To Disarm The System ue doe scr ee RE Bi illuminated Entry If Equipped ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE D To Unlock The Doors o To Lock The Doors O To Unlatch The Trunk 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MMM Esme The Panic Alarm 29 93 3 ESE EER EE 22 O Programming Additional Transmitters 29 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 23 O General Information 24 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 El How io Use Remote Start iii ec seas 25 W Door Locks ias duke RE OE ELEK 28 E Manual Door Locks 22 ERRERX SEES 28 OPower Door Locks sean ocn ay ne oe UR CER 29 o Child Protection Door Lock System edt DOORS ose xs R ORE tage EER es Gee ad 22 W Keyless Enter N Go lees 33 _ Windows METER IE EE EE RE ET 38 O ower WWINdOWS xa ex bahay om BE eo Rene tii 38 O Wind Buffetng se oo
266. ing careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 For center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and adjustable headrest with the headrest in the full down position then attach the hook to the tether anchor located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window 022637851 Adjustable Headrest Downward Position WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to l aa increased head motion and possible injury to the child Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installi
267. into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e T Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 344 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 EXAMPLE 95 Loa
268. iod Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition mam Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page before speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in your favorites phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mMm e You can say O letter O for 0 zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e n a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely
269. ire service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration ei For states that reguire an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON the engine is running and that the OBD II system is position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of ready for testing a normal bulb check Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will system may n
270. ired phone and Bluetooth audio device within range If you would need to choose a particular phone or device follow the steps Touch the Phone soft key Touch the Settings soft key Touch to select the particular phone or device Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Disconnecting A Device e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Options soft key then touch the next to the appropriate device to be disconnected e The options pop up will be displayed e Touch the Disconnect Device soft key e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Deleting A Device e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Options soft key then touch the next to the appropriate device to be disconnected e The options pop up will be displayed e Touch the Delete Device soft key e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen N UNDER STANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Making A Phone A Favorite Touch the Phone soft key Touch the Settings soft key Touch the Options soft key then touch the next to the appropriate device to be disconnected The options pop up will be displayed Touch the Make Favorite soft key You will see the chosen device move to the top of the list Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phon
271. irp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlatch The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional
272. irregular wear even if it occurs before 64 000 miles 104 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing All Wheel Drive AWD O C C C C L G LL L M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 490 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN ed 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service 54 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 80 000 miles 130 000 km J Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road cond
273. is feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds programmable when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 To activate the delay feature place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off If you turn the headlights or parking lights on or place the ignition in ACC or RUN the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE e The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this feature e The headlight delay time is programmable using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information SmartBeam If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle spe cific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE e SmartBeam can be turned on or off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument P
274. iter Engine with All Wheel Drive MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 11 4 Quarts 10 8 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System MOPAR 14 7 Quarts 13 9 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System MOPAR 15 1 Quarts 14 3 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 3 6L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPARS Engine Oil Filter or equivalent opark Plugs 3 6L Engine RER8ZWYCB4 Gap 0 031 in 0 79 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 3 6L Engine 87 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479 Chassis
275. ith FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button for unauthorized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro vide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 additional minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MMM To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the theft alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition syst
276. itions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 72 000 miles 117 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 104 000 miles 169 000 km Inspect exhaust system Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for front axle fluid All Wheel Drive damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary AWD M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 491 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 miles 143 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 492 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule C
277. ive OFF Indicator Light o D This light will illuminate when the O D OFF button has been selected and overdrive has been turned off 21 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first tumed to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information 22 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call
278. k is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed With the ignition in the OFF position or the key removed from the ignition switch the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Trunk Emergency Release Before Starting Your Vehicle for more information on The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature release handle It is located on the inside of the trunk lid near the latch and is coated so that it glows in a darkened TRUNK SAFETY WARNING trunk Pull on the handle to open the trunk WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke Trunk Emergency Release NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag e Su
279. l position ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC When ever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving conditions The ESC should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESC normally allows The ESC Off switch is located on the switch bank in the center of the instrument panel To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will illu minate To turn the ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will turn off NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn the ESC on again by momen tarily pressing t
280. lant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CAUTION Continued Please review these recommendati
281. lar cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner
282. lated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle 376 STARTING AND OPERATING NN ed CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a
283. lease it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction is detected the sunroof will automatically re tract Remove the obstruction if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re sult in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing the sunroof press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button and the sunroof will open to
284. leen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scou
285. lete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly omith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Push To Talk PTT button Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the button and say a command or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu You can also press the or vr buttons when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM NOTE Pressin
286. level should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole Fluid Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Axle For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not reguired When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Change Axle Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold we
287. line sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system Continued 378 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition WARNING malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly some light smoke your engine may be out of tune Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon or malfunctioning and may require immediate monoxide poisoning service Contact your authorized dealer for service e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon assistance monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can e The use of fuel additives which are now being kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as sold as octane enhancers is not recommended a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the Most of these products contain high concentra engine running for an extended period If the tions of m
288. ll display when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of e System Cancel poor visibility such as in snow or heavy rain The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the e System Off EVIC will display Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle and the system will deactivate e Distance Setting Change e Driver Override e ACC Proximity Warning e ACC Unavailable Warning The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mMm The Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflective tiles or ice and snow The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur Clean Radar Sensor In Front of Vehicle 032433103 Clean Radar Sensor Warning NOTE If the ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the se
289. lly be re engaged To Resume Speed Press the RES button and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed Adaptive NOTE You can resume ACC from a minimum of Cruise Control 20 mph 32 km h WARNING Cancelled 96789 mi The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed 03243400 that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation This could cause a collision and or serious injury Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push and release the ON OFF button NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 To Vary The Speed Setting While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to in crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h While ACC is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continu
290. m 65 30 cm 30 cm Front Distance Greater than 4 47 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than 12 in in cm 47 in 120 cm 120 100 cm 65 30 cm 65 30 cm 30 cm Audible Alert Mane Single 1 2 Chime second tone Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object AE SIE AON Detected Detected Detected Detected 3 Solid l Arc Continuous 3 Flashing 2 Slow Flashing 1 Slow Flashing Enabling And Disabling ParkSense When the ParkSense soft key is pressed to disable the ParkSense can be enabled and disabled using the system the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF Uconnect Touch System The available choices are Off message for approximately five seconds Refer to Elec Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Uconnect tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE or to DRIVE at or below 11 mph 18 km h and the system is Slow Fast Continuous NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE or for 5 seconds when the vehicle is in DRIVE The ParkSense system uses four sensors located in the rear bumper fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in 200 cm away from the rear bumper fascia The Park Sense system uses
291. main in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery b
292. mation 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed If the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS message ap pears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and the rear fascia bumper or front fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruc tion see your authorized dealer If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see your autho rized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST OFF Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE or DRIVE position and ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE and when the vehicle is in DRIVE at or below 11 mph 18 km h E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 e Clean the ParkSense
293. me narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations have moved fully into the lane There will not be suffi where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and cient distance to the vehicle ahead the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 General Information FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems Classification Specifications 47 C ER Part 15 47 C ER Part 15 515 Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a normal fixed speed Cruise Control mode is available for cruis ing at fixed speeds The normal Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir ing the driver to operate the accelerator Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h To change modes press the MODE button when the system is in either the OFF READY or SET position Cruise Ready will be displayed if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position Cruise Off will be displayed if the system was in the ACC OFF position To switch back to Adaptive Cruise Control mode press the MODE button a second time WARNING not react to vehicles ah
294. ment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compart ment access is a push push design Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close J T 033333448 Sunglass Bin Door GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead console and contain one two or three dots lines desig nating the different HomeLink channels 034033576 HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon Monoxide is poi sonous when inhaled and cause you and others to be severely injured or killed NOTE Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse
295. meter read ings vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged TIRE CHAINS parts of the chain before further use Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet Install chains on the rear wheels Doi tightly as SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain mile 0 8 km manufacturer Install tire chains only on P215 65R17 and Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h P225 60R18 size tires Refer to tirechains com for more Continued information 362 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION Continued e Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Use on rear wheels only Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufac turer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacture NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instruc tions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle m
296. must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 502 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN ed This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 247 9753 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center PO Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D
297. n available screens FCW Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions FCW will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating FCW again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer Service FCW Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 96789 mi 032433104 ACC FCW Unavailable Warning PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward e g during a parking maneuver 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limi tations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE or D
298. n 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor the places provided alternator or electrical system may occur J UMP STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully Preparations For J ump Start The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk NOTE When using a portable battery booster Pack Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and engine compartment for jump starting precautions WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 415 WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Remote Positive Post 2 Remote Negative Post Remote Batte
299. n driving through standing water The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts Driving through standing water limits your vehi while parking and good feel while driving If the electro cle s braking capabilities which increases stop hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that ping distances Therefore after driving through prevents it from providing power steering assist then the standing water drive slowly and lightly press on System will provide mechanical steering capability CAUTION Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you assistance in order to prevent damage to the system Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool If the SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM el message and a flashing icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information If the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP mes sage and an i
300. n is not turned to the OFF position first 318 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id e The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating Therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break in period This is a normal condition and pre cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the brake pedal must be firmly pressed before the shift lock will release Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift lever is in the DRIVE or REVERSE position WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the transmission into PARK press the ENGINE START STOP button to tum off the engine and apply the parking brake Once the ENGINE START STOP button is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Over Temp
301. n only function and cannot be reset Press and release the BACK button to return to the main menu Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT button and Coolant Temp will be displayed Press the UP or DOWN button to scroll through the following information displays e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature e AWD Status If Equipped Displays a vehicle ICON with four wheels highlighted and AWD if All Wheel Drive is active Displays a vehicle ICON with two wheels highlighted and RWD if All Wheel Drive is inactive e Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 e Trans Temperature Displays the actual transmission temperature e Engine Hours Displays the number of hours of engine operation Messages Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons This feature shows the number of stored warning mes sages in the place holder Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to see what the stored messages are Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main Menu Turn Menu OFF Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button Press ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display Pressing any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the menu back Uconnect TOUCH SETTINGS
302. nce Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Conference soft key on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the button or the end soft key Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automati cally This is cell phone dependent Redial e Press the Redial soft key e or press the amp and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial EI 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF NOTE the call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth connection It is recommended to press the transfer soft key when leaving the vehicle Uconnect Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and
303. nd erase the set speed in memory if e You push and release the ON OFF button e You turn off the ignition e You switch off ESC If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated the system will return to the last driver setting ACC or Normal Cruise Control NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 Forward Collision Warning If Equipped Forward Collision Warning FCW warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller EBC wheel speed sensors i e to calculate a probable rear end collision When the system determines that a rear end collision is probable a warning message both audible and visual will be displayed on the EVIC When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable the warning message will be deactivated 23456 mi 032433107 FCW Message NOTE The minimum speed for FCW activation is 10 mph 16 km h 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Forward Collision Warning FCW is not intended to avoid a collision on its own The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death Changing F
304. nder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EOUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or unlock any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur t
305. nder controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 508 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 510 INDEX NEE Id About Your Brakes ABS Anti Lock Brake System Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Contr
306. nder inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in tire over heating and failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel c
307. ne year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed WARNING Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children And Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large F
308. nes Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle Side Monitoring Entering From The Rear Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 16 km h the warning light will not illuminate Rear Monitoring Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed of less than 10 mph 16 km h and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Overtaking Passing The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage berms etc However occasionally the system may alert on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service Objects The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes
309. ng the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belts The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR to secure a Child Restraint System CRS These types of seatbelts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 ma Automatic Locking Mode The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plat
310. not in OFF LOCK or if it is in ACC or RUN 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed positions and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Cycling the ignition to the OFF LOCK position and closing the door will allow the locks to operate Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws Automatic Door Locks Programming If Equipped The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with Uconnect Touch refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the Uconnect Touch perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch NN THINGS TO KN
311. ns and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 506 e Seroice Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquain
312. nsor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille To keep the ACC System operating properly it is impor tant to note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens e Do not remove any screws from the sensor Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment e If the sensor is damaged due to a collision see your authorized dealer for service e Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it NOTE Installing a vehicle front end protector or an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom mended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC operation 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MAM ACC Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be tempo
313. nt and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate NOTE e Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWKRs e Refer to the Tire Placard for your vehicle s proper tire pressure TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
314. o select LO level ventilation Press the soft key a third time to shut off the seat ventilation NOTE The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mMm WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Restraints Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Active Head Restraints AHR In the event of a rear impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants head and the AHR The AHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a r
315. o send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the vr button and say for ex ample Send Voicemail password The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encountered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignored e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature e Pauses wait or other characters that are supported by some phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored in the dial ing a numbered sequence Barge In Overriding Prompts The vr button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command imme diately For example if a prompt is asking There are 2 numbers with the name John Say the full name you could press the VR button and say John Smith to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Voic
316. o the temperatures occurring in the area where e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the vehicle is operated the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes causes pressure to build up in the cooling system Cooling System Pressure Cap To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of pressure cap while the system is hot or under coolant and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze pressure will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery Do not use a pressure cap other than the one bottle specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any gine damage may result accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to re
317. oach Lighting If Equipped 95 O Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped O Power Mirrors O Power Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped o Heated Mirrors If Equipped O Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped ll Blind Spot Monitoring If Equipped o Rear Cross Path o Modes Of Operation 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Bl Uconnect Touch 84 84 NAV O Uconnect Phone O Operation o Phone Call Features DH Uconnect Phone Features H Advanced Phone Connectivity O Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect PRONG ssc es sera tee sr sags O General Information Bl Uconnect Voice Command 8 4 8 4 NAV D Uconnect Voice Command System Sli PPP O Uconnect Voice Commands D Voice Tree Wo Mt oues cies RSS EE sue bs RU VES 147 106 O Power Seats If Equipped sss rmn 147 110 oO Power Lumbar If Equipped 149 121 o Heated Seats If Equipped 150 126 D Ventilated Seats If Equipped 152 130 Hllead Restaints 24455 843 45464 eee aes 158 G Folding Real Dea sain seek SAKE E San ier ad es 156 ll Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 157 iu O Programming The Memory Feature 158 sd O Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Iransmitter To Memory 159 ad o Memory Position Recall LL 160 m O Easy Entry Exit Seat 143 Available With Memory Seat Only
318. occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided e Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately Compact Spare Tire The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity e Keep tire inflated to 60 psi 414 KPa cold inflation pressure e This tire is designed as an emergency spare only Do not exceed 50 mph 80 km h speed WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413 Center Cap Installation If Equipped 1 Mount the road tire on the axle For vehicles equipped with center caps proceed to Step 4 2 Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the valve stem Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the
319. ode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions
320. of the LEDs are turn signal indicators which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the vehicle Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie The fourth uppermost LED supplies illuminated entry lighting which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open any door This LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles It also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of the doors The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the ignition is placed into the RUN position NOTE The approach lighting will not function when the shift lever is moved out of the PARK position Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver s view of the ground rearward of the front doors The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir rors in Reverse position NOTE The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch
321. of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched r
322. ol 184 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 448 lelie Fuel 22a wx 3 ded RR ED bas ages 382 Adding Washer FI 2a moenie Ee dne 443 Additives Fuel 3123 330m 20009 108 DEERE RS MOER 377 Adjustable Pedals a4 xxu bee od een ee RR 179 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 436 Air Conditioner Maintenance 439 sur C ondiHonine FIGE s voee spe inresa 305 440 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 439 440 Air Conditioning System 302 439 Air Pressure Tires 00000000 939 ur PL a 56 65 Ambas Deployment ses ia oek 9 HERE RE ed 66 ANDIE LEN osse d e tore PER EES 63 69 83 259 ADAS Mainienaitee essri perir Edi es 68 PUA ide uuu es eee Ie doe mens quie EE 59 62 65 Airbag Window Side Curtain 60 62 65 Alarm Security Alat ous o 33e SORS P UR iti 17 drm EP sate teen 4 ARE RES mq EE QE NS 259 Alarm System Security Alarm 17 Alarm DS 242 6 342793 ER 2E Ee ACER P dE 22 All Wheel Drive AWD 324 455 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 332 334 Anti Lock Warming Light civicateueson ese xs 254 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Antifreeze Engine Coolant vio a vac Sam sco 447 477 Disposal 22 205495 043009 3 RV ee eee eee 449 ppe ANGS C ME aca ges eee RARR ERA ee 456 Arming Theft System Security Alarm y Assist Hill Start
323. on The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE e Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur e Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will automati cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce
324. on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth in order to use this feature If the Uconnect Phone determines your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over Bluetooth the Messaging button will be greyed out and the feature will not be available for use NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 NOTE Uconnect Phone SMS is only available when Read Messages the vehicle is not in moving If you receive a new text message while your phone is 68 44 t FM 91 7 10 10 Nw 54 ou TEE connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will Messaging gt Inbo x be made to notify you that you have a new text message 68 4 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ou We 72 3 James Butler 9 39 am 12 08 08 Hey Bill am on my way to work Let me know if you have E 14 James Butler Listen me Ed 13 248 576 5459 Listen Message 12 Beatrice Adams Listen mj 11 Sanjiv Prabaker Listen Y 10 Lin Ford Listen F 9 Jay Kay op 35 ap 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM Once a message is received and viewed or listened to EES rr 10 10 NW 54 ou Ww 72 you will have the following opti
325. on to the driver and no driver interaction is required ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation STARTING AND OPERATING 341 Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ES
326. onds between cycles The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less Mist Feature Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Headlights On With Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In ad
327. onitoring Low Pressure Warnings A The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE message will be displayed and a chime will sound when tire pres sure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE 368 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id message will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The TPM Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wh
328. only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof switches can be programmed to remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Opening either front door will cancel this feature Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 Volt 13 Amp electrical power outlets on this vehicle Both of the power outlets are protected by a fuse Insert cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power outlets for use to ensure proper operation NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used CAUTION e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed The fr
329. ons MEER TE ES x e Send a Reply nbox 1 Yes 2 N e Forward LR 3 Call me e Call 4 Need directions Send Messages Using Soft Keys 31 1 h dad m ara TUER 6 Okay You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message e Touch the Phone soft key e If multiple numbers are available for the contact select which number you would like to have the message e Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person sent you wish to send the message to e Touch the messaging soft key then new message e Press Send or Cancel NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Send Messages Using Voice Commands 68947 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ou e Press the S button Neuen ad i 1 Yes e After the Listening prompt and the following beep nu TET 2 No say Send message to John Smith mobile 3 Call me e After the system prompts you for what message you 4 Need directions want to send say the message you wish to send or say 5 I ll be there in XX minutes List There are 18 preset messages 6 Okay While the list of defined messages are being read you can interrupt the system by pressing the VR button and saying the message you want to send l List of Preset Messages After the system confirms that you want to send your message to John Smith your message will be sent Lgs 2 No 3 Okay 4 I can t talk right now 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHI
330. ons for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant e This vehicle has not been designed for use with antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze propylene glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR coolant antifreeze is not recommended Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or Adding Coolant equivalent TOME vehicle has been built with an improved engine e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are to five years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before anticipated replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte u nance period it is important that you use the same Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your ized water when mixing the water engine coolant vehicle antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main WARNING tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording t
331. onsumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 354 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla
332. ont 12 Volt power outlet has power available only WARNING when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicle s not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result The center console outlet located on the back of the center console is powered directly from the battery power available at all times Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent the engine from starting Front Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 FER AAR dot E ie IERE as 072736519 Center Console Power Outlet Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel And Power Outlet Console Rear 2 38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed WARNING CAUTION Continued To avoid serious injury or death e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Ev
333. ontrol handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column 031736847 Tilt Telescoping Control Handle To unlock the steering column pull the control handle outward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle inward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column p Power Tilt Telescoping Steering To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
334. operly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Eise MAREE OR EE segue EE 94 O Automatic Dimming Mirror 94 PL OVGESICC MITOS yey ota eee hare HO OAR 94 D Outside Mirrors Folding Feature EODD 3 socer eso RR POCO Y PL pw ES es 95 H Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror EGIDIUS guion gut dept SEEP RO DV rg S 95 O Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Appr
335. or the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door WARNING lock knob on each door trim panel upward e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle set the ignition switch to the OFF position Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death Continued Door Lock Knob NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave ignition in the ACC or RUN positions A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim lt A 021535322 panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry system For further information refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle If you press the power door lock switch while the ignition is
336. or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instructions STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS W Starting Procedures iss emos odie Hae dees 312 W Automatic Transmission 316 O Automatic Transmission 312 O General Information HKevless Enter NO so ss eee Ss p OE i use 313 D Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System E Normal SIE sserrep RD HARE eee ee eas 219 O Five Speed Automatic Transmission O Extreme Cold Weather HG ear Ranges s ue cheer Re ES S EED RR DE 319 Ki ai EE SIS MAutoStick a a 323 O If Engine Fails To Start 5 2292x969 axe eed 315 TE ee era 323 BL ATIS NS sos uideret HER eee PRE ee ees 315 Bl All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 324 ll Engine Block Heater If Equipped 316 308 STARTING AND OPERATING NN ed Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 325 Becca ius ea 9 0 eu RE O
337. or Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or WARNING slouching can move the belt out of position e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back actly when installing an infant or child restraint NOTE For additional information refer to A rearward facing child restraint should only be www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy site for additional information http www tc gc ca ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm fatal injury to the infant 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFO
338. ot be ready if your vehicle was recently happen serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace MT TT AE EE E ment If the OBD II system should be determined not cay oa bed Mi test vourveluclemes dall the est return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF l the ignition or start the engine This means that your Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should which you can use prior to going to the test station To not proceed to the I M station check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must de b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system crank or start the engine is ready and you can proceed to the I M station 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your this test over authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL
339. ottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or
340. pdated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Phonebook gt Mobile gt A Ana Conda Add to Favorites f 248 123 4567 248 456 7891 a 248 577 6215 Managing Your Favorite Phonebook There are three ways you can add an entry to your Favorite Phonebook 1 During an active call of a number to make a favorite touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone main screen NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 NOTE If the Favorites list is full you will be asked to RRS 10 10 NW 54 out Wb 72 remove an existing favorite L ETO ETT 3 From the Phone main screen select phonebook From a Voicemail AE Mobile v the phonebook screen select favorites and then select the r Options Select an empty entry and touch the on that Missis selected entry When the Options pop up appears touch Add from mobile You will then be asked which contact and number to choose from your mobile phonebook When complete the new favorite will be shown Empty maa Mom s Cell e Emergency Towing Assistance To Remove A Favorite e To remove a Favorite select phonebook from the Phone main screen e Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and then touch the Options soft key 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e Touch the next to the Favorite you would like to remove 68 af FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Ww 72 Phonebook gt ptons Po
341. po rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T 5 Temporary Spare Tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited
342. pplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in t
343. press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll 314 STARTING AND OPERATING NN ed NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position ENGINE START STOP Button Functions With Driver s Foot OFF the Brake Pedal In PARK or NEUTRAL Position The Keyless Enter N Go feature operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position e Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVI
344. pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occu pant protection 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags SAB Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag are designed to provide additional protec tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending
345. proximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements If your vehicle is E 85 compatible it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two fuels For best results a refueling pattern that avoids alternat ing between E 85 and unleaded gasoline is recom mended When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not add less than 5 gal 19 L when refueling e you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE e Use seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel ASTM D5798 With non seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed especially when the ambient temperature is below 32 F 0 C ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOP
346. quipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con trol ESC is off ee OFF 13 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 14 Fuel Door Reminder The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the lt Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle 15 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 16 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 17 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE e You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK e The highest available transmission gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC whenever the Electronic Range UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 Select ERS feature is active Use the selector on the shift lever to activate ERS Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting And Operating for further information 18 Vehicle Security
347. r NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the Off Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e ParkView Backup Camera Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera soft key until a check mark appears next to
348. r Blades a si EN ema 442 Care Contool se repos eee the beak BAR 296 SU PITE 292 Com Holder RENEE Pu Vus ghia ES 242 Cold Weather Operation 224 odes ah iaren 314 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 295 Compact Spare TE 4 34245 6445 6443084 RE 356 Computer py ravel nse seh ERG RS T RES 275 N INDEX 513 Connector UCI Universal Consumer Interface UCI Conserving Fuel Console Floor Console Overhead Contract Service Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap Cooling System Adding Coolant Antifreeze Coolant Capacity Coolant Level Disposal of Used Coolant Drain Flush and Refill Inspection Points to Remember Pressure Cap Radiator Cap Selection of Coolant Antifreeze EE ETE as 449 Corrosion Protech x5 49 am PER VERA FO EE 456 Cruise Control Speed Control 184 CCUDBODIdOIS oru T PARE EE SS ENS 239 46 Customer Assistance llle se 501 Data Recorder Event 0 0000048 69 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 171 Daytime Running Lights 5 555245 HR EL 6a 166 Dealer erie iese one dean tee ee ees 431 Deck Lid Emergency Release a seed see uenia 42 Deck Lid Power Release 41 Defroster Rear Window 246 Defroster Windshield 83 300 Delay Intermittent Wipers 179 Diagnostic System Onboard 429 Dimmer Switch Headlight 168 Dipsticks Oil Engine Disable
349. r Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 L of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged 444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e A hot exhaust system c
350. r broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats d
351. r cannot be removed 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FUSES CAUTION Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment This module contains fuses and relays e When installing the integrated power module cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the integrated power module and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected ui 072710829 d Integrated Power Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse mw NN Fuse Spare Radiator Fan 1 x Yellow Power Steering 1 LIER 10 Amp Air Conditioning Clutch Red Ee LERE Natural Fuse Spare 16 Fuse Spare uh eue IE emer Security Red 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse see Fuse Spare ERA bis aas Fuse Spare Natural O e IE Fuse Spare Pe al Natural Red
352. r capability WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 WARNING Continued NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having CAUTION adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions e Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious damage Stop the CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odo
353. r press the X soft key to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings Display After pressing the Display soft key the following settings will be available NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 e Display Mode When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings Io change Mode status touch and release the Day Night or Auto soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Set Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the Set Language soft key and then touch the desired language soft key until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow
354. rarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer Service ACC Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 56789 mi 032433104 ACC FCW Unavailable Warning NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpect edly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene Adding A Trailer Hitch The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance of ACC If there is a noticeable change in performance following the installation of a trailer hitch or if the ACC performance does not return to normal after removing the trailer hitch see your authorized dealer Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly 3 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Turns And Bends
355. ration then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency AutoStick By using the AutoStick mode and selecting a specific gear range frequent shifting can be avoided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 adequate performance For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce sp
356. re surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate istance to the rear of the vehicle Red ft 30cm When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle while a dashed center line will indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to 3 o a hitch receiver The static grid lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone Yellow i ft 3 ft BO cm 1m 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed WARNING CAUTION Drivers must be careful when backing up even when e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob drive path structions or blind spots before backing up You are To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be responsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using Park View to be able to must continue to pay attention while backing up stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom Failure to do so can result in s
357. re two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or an other prompt For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith mo bile For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Search for John Smith or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition VR engine NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or comp
358. reak in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding
359. rees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Drive Center Passenger FirstRow N A N A AR ALIR AIR AIR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor M
360. remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button NOTE The message Push Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push the START button 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id DOOR LOCKS If the door lock knob is down when you shut the do
361. retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best i Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position 022636838 NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 deg
362. riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the reguire ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of
363. ring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and MOPAR Carpet Cleaner or equivalent for carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or MOPAR Satin Select or equivalent Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regu
364. rious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle cycle the ignition OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter a Keyless Ignition Node KIN and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle After cycling the ignition switch to the ON RUN posi tion the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MMM Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as
365. rregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the air conditioning filter 24 000 miles 39 000 km Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect the CV joints Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect exhaust system Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for front axle fluid All Wheel Drive damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary AWD Inspect the transfer case fluid AII Wheel Drive AWD M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 487 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 40 000 miles 65 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a m Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 48 0
366. rtment Of Transportation Uniform Tire E DROChOB Grades 24i bos ce md Posee x9 RAE 507 Quality Gades se ii othe MBR DRR ye Bi 507 oO Treadwear eet oO ee Oe DES SES HESS EEO 507 Temperate Grades sins oe ee RE 3 508 NN IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 501 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service
367. rward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward CAUTION toward the driver Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF e The pedals can be adjusted while driving to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys adjustable pedal s path tem is on The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In formation System EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjust Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving able Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or You could lose control and have an accident Always Adjustable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked NOTE Por venices equipped wif Driver Memory Seat ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter pan engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to i a accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph return the adju
368. ry Posts 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park CAUTION the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the could establish a ground connection and personal remote positive post of the discharged vehicle injury could result 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper J ump Starting Procedure cable to the positive post of the booster battery WARNING o 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the MORNING negative post of the booster battery Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 417 WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark co
369. s e For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect Touch refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the Uconnect Touch perform the following steps 1 Enter the vehicle and close all doors 2 Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch 3 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position However do not start the engine 4 Within 30 seconds press the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 5 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming NOTE If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure 6 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNL
370. s 3 You can replace B s on 8 with any other satellite station name received by the Radio 4 You can replace 8 with any other satellite station name received by the Radio 030536631 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEE Uconnect Hands Free Music Control These commands can be spoken when playing music from your SD card USB device CD or iPod after pushing the Usonmect valce command button Radio will play the Audio Book Dr Jekyll and Mr Hyde Radio will play Radio will play Radio will play the Radio will pla Radio will play the album the Artist Scott Song Maple Leaf 2 ans the Playlist Party ragtime favorites Joplin Rag 8 tunes Radio will play the Podcast Weekly Radio will play track 8 Auto Podcast Note Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030536938 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Uconnect Voice Command Travel Link commands The commands can be spoken on amy screen when not on a phone call after pushing the Uconnect voice command button insert talking head icone on the steering wheel Screen will change to Travel Link Home Screen will change to Travel Link Screen will Screen will Screen will change to change to change to Travel Link Travel Link NFL Sports Favorites Headlines Screen will Screen will change to change to Travel Link Travel Link Fuel Prices Wea
371. s at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Checking Oil Level 5 7L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa Hon NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API
372. s 4a 225 O Service The Parksense Park Assist System 213 D Reprogramming A Single O Cleaning The Parksense System 214 Pine EA MR EN 226 is O Parksense System Usage Precautions 214 O Security ei 226 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MEM El TroubleshooBne TIPS s sew ERROR ED 226 E lenition Off Operation s aces eee KER DS 230 O General Information 227 W Command View Sunroof With Power Shade EE AN 227 ICEOUIDDEU sacs ud tae DER REOR RE CC 251 4 Opening Sunroof Express 228 O Opening Sunroof Express 232 3 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 228 O Venting Sunroof Express 292 4 Closing Sunroof Express i e ee 229 O Closing Sunroof Express 282 B Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 229 sa RT ees eue O Pinch Protect Feature 229 eSNG EOC eae RSS eee ae a Ee B Pinch Protect Override 229 E And iin n a i m 233 ga om oi ET Ee O Pinch Protect Feature 2 44 os ma 239 EE EI 2 O Pinch Protect Override 234 mL CM ET ET N O Pinch Protect Override Cancellation 234 O Sunroof Maintenance 0 230 Eie EEUE ouo ee aoe 9 1 KORE d 234 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 O Swaroot Maintenance su Ee e ROEM Ea 234 El Door OES 36245254554 ERROR RE ees 244 E onition Off OperatiOfi us ceea AE RE topeka 239 o Rear Seat Armrest Storage
373. s a blue hue to the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 Standard Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp Inner Park Lamp and Outer Park Lamp 1 Open the hood NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle 2 Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and 1 High Beam Headlamp Bulb install the replacement bulb 2 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head lamp assembly and then turn it clockwise 474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 818dafcb 3 Park Turn Lamp Bulb 4 Inner Park Lamp Bulb 5 Outer Park Lamp Bulb N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 CAUTION 5 Pull the tail lamp assembly away from the vehicle enough to access the electrical connector Do not touch the new bulb wath your Hinger OU o Tah the electrical connector locking tab to the side contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the 7 Disconnect the electrical connector bulb with rubbing alcohol 8 Continue removing lamp from vehicle in order to Rear Backup Lamp and Turn Signal Lamps access the bulb s
374. s ap proximately 20 ft 6 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE e The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones e The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The BSM system can also be configured to sound an audible chime alert and mute the radio to notify the driver of objects that have entered the detection zo
375. s driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level r
376. s eee kay ae een ER 41 W Trunk Lock And Release 41 W Trunk Safety Warning 42 O Irunk Emergency Release as s rs 42 W Occupant Restraints EE Se 43 El Lap Shoulder DENS ou iu Des Be bc BR AE 46 D Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 51 O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 51 D Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR IE POUIPPCO 2 42205 445 635545 nee 52 O Energy Management Feature 93 NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Heil Belt Pretensioner iis DS Gas 53 EMC Restraints P DD 70 O Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System lBl Engine Break In Recommendations 80 ad EE aus zd ea EE N EER O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 99 D Transporting Passengers 81 O peat Belt EXICNCE as e ii ia GER ER ME 55 SUNT Gas 89 EP DnE EE leu O Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The ek EE ET i pln TU 83 H Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 62 O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make O Event Data Recorder EDR 69 Outside The Vehicle 85 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MMM A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node KIN Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Starting Procedure in
377. s screen e Time Format When in this display you may select the time format display setting Touch the Time Format soft key until a check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Show Time In Status Bar When in this display you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Safety Assistance After pressing the Safety Assistance soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Front Collision Sensitivity If Equipped The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change the FCW status touch and release the OFF Near or Far button Then touch the arrow
378. s seat belt 2 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 NOTE You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of cycling the ignition to the ON RUN position 3 Within 60 seconds of cycling the ignition to the ON RUN position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Cycle the ignition to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully com pleted the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take
379. s selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Compass Settings After pressing the Compass Settings soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 5 040506040 3 10 NM 6 7a Compass Variance Map e Perform Compass Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft
380. s selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HI level If the HlI level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LO level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automati cally after a maximum of 45 minutes Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Ed Rear Heated Seats On vehicles eguipped with rear heated seats the seats closest to the doors are heated The controls for these seats are located on the rear of the center console You can choose from HI LO or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI one for LO and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HI level heating Press the switch a second time to select LO level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF If the HI level heating is selected the system will auto matically switch to LO level heating after
381. s the button on the right side of CHMSL Center High Mounted Stop Light which is located on the deck lid 021836834 Trunk Passive Entry Button NOTE If you inadvertently leave your vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless another one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmit ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft 1 0 m of the deck lid NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 To Lock The Vehicle s Doors NOTE With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock handles press the door handle LOCK button to lock all the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This P four doors is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by D pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking e The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel 021834092 Outside Door Handle Lock Button 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control all the door windows 021935320
382. se cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The automatic load leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system POWER SUNSCREEN IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sunscreen that will reduce the amount of sunlight that will shine through the rear windshield 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The power sunscreen can be operated using the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Press the
383. second detent past the intermittent position The multifunction lever is located on the left settings for high speed wiper operation side of the steering column CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Windshield Wiper Washer Control Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 CAUTION Continued e Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are four delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 sec
384. sing the ParkSense Park Assist System Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear EQUIPPED camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear appears again Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check enti
385. soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies w
386. stable pedals to pre programmed positions 40 km h Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel N y ON OFF CANCEL 1 ON OFF 2 RES 4 CANCEL 3 SET NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desire
387. steps to protect your ee 25 en e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery Natura 10 Amp Airbag Module e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of TERE service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the Fuse Spare Blue possibility of compressor damage when the system is px ES rS ou started again 69 Fuse Spare 70 Fuse Spare N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lamps WsW Rear Compartment Irunk Lamp 562 Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578 MIO Vanity LOB s vau dup nee ee e eee A6220 Glove Box Lamp If Equipped 194 Door Eofiies hu crest reman PER OER MEE Ke 562 Shift Indicator Lamp 3x29 IE RED Ks JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement Exterior Bulb Number Low Beam High Beam Bi Halogen Headlamp Low Beam High Beam Bi Xenon Headlamp D3S Servi
388. strument panel R F m Opened Glovebox Storage Compartment Console Features There is a cubby bin located forward of the shift lever The cubby bin is covered with a push push actuated door Push inward on the door to open it push the door a second time to close it Glovebox Storage Compartment Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the center console armrest 035335227 Center Console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 Inside the center console armrest there is a removable upper storage tray that can be slid forward rearward on rails for access to the lower storage area This tray has an integrated coin holder along with additional area for small items like an ipod or phone Below the upper tray the lower storage compartment is made for larger items like CDs and tissue boxes In addition the 12 volt power outlet USB and Aux jack are located here WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Door Storage Rear Seat Armrest Storage If Equipped The door panels contain storage areas For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the armrest Lif
389. stry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Key Fob with Remote x2 Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed e Trunk closed e HAZARD switch off e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e
390. sult in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455 CAUTION Continued e The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and front differential The exterior surface of these compo nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible The transfer case fluid fill inspection plug is located in the middle of the rear housing To inspect the transfer case fluid level remove the fill inspection plug The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole Use this plug to add fluid as required The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover near the halfshaft attachment To inspect the differ ential fluid level remove the fill plug The fluid
391. sure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings IN The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the in ref strument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE message and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire wall the low tire pressure values flashing 2 M P nisi Em T p MAMA E mam 819793fc ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recom mended cold placard pressure inflation value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not ro a received gasse a fa A E E Ms een E b E 2 LS pem WT 5 i Ex Bass ae M 81979
392. sure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value 366 STARTING AND OPERATING NN ed CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and or condition warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tr
393. system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 Kg 396 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN ed CAUTION WARNING Continued If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg Towing any trailer will increase your stopping loaded it should have its own brakes and they distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven brakes when
394. t caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Maintaining Your Airbag
395. t or run the engine while the vehicle is access the jack on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on 1 Open the trunk a lift 2 Lift the access cover using the pull strap The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405 Opening The Access Panel Spare Tire Fastener 3 Remove the fastener securing the spare tire 4 Remove the spare tire 406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5 Remove the fastener securing the jack 060535620 Jack Fastener 6 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly WARNING e A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided e Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately Preparations For J acking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407 WARNING NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehi
396. t upward on the latch to open the storage compartment 035235231 Front Door Trim Storage 1 Rear Armrest Storage NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 ee Split Folding Rear Seat WARNING Continued The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling ar seatbacks in the locked up or folded down nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When position should not be used is play area by the seats are folded down they provide a continuous children when the vehicle is in motion They could nearly flat extension of the load floor be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint When the seatback is folded to the upright position make system sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Continued 246
397. t you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 507 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured u
398. tales include e Shift Lever Status The selected AutoStick gear is displayed as 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 and indicate the Electronic Range Select ERS feature has been engaged and the gear selected is displayed For further information on ERS refer to Starting And Operating e Electronic Speed Control ON This telltale will illuminate when the electronic O speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Electronic Speed Control SET This telltale will illuminate when the electronic O speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON This telltale will illuminate when the ACC is R5 ON For further information refer to Adap tive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC SET This telltale will illuminate when the ACC is ie SET For further information refer to Adap tive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 EVIC Amber Telltales This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include e Forward Collision Warning FCW OFF FCW This telltale informs the driver that the For ward Collision Warning feature is Off The OFF telltale is
399. tanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper speed is in the low or high position e The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms It will not operate under the following conditions e Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 32 F 0 C unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside temperature rises above freezing e Neutral Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position the transmission shift lever is in the NEU TRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph 8 km h unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping c
400. tch 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel light operation Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF position To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Time Delay Th
401. the ON position not in the LOCK or ACC positions The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur Flatbed towing is recommended DO NOT tow an AWD vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground If the transmission is operable vehicles WITHOUT AWD may be towed with rear wheels on the ground under the following conditions e The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL e The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 mi 24 km e The vehicle speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 423 If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift and the transmission in NEUTRAL CAUTION Failure to follow these towing methods can cause severe transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Vehicles equipped with AWD can be towed with the transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the ground with no limitation on speed or distance Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the OFF position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle MAINTAINING YOUR VEHIC
402. the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a mini mum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure 374 STARTING AND OPERATING warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses United States 644 664 kat s MRXC4W4MA4 Canada 2546A C4W4MA4 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 6L Engine If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular g
403. the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call Emergency or Dial Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The Emergency call may also be initiated by touch e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your NOTE chances of successfully making a phone call as to that e The towing assistance call may also be initiated by for the mobile phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays paired to the Uconnect Phone touch The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the Warr
404. then stored as long as the condition that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an i will be displayed in the EVIC s compass outside temp line Examples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure e Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake and Push Button to Start e Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Ex amples of this message type are Memory System Un available Not in Park and Automatic High Beams On The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left EVIC White Telltales This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell tales These tell
405. ther Movie Listings 030536937 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM Uconnect Voice Command Non phone Universal amp Mode Commands The commands can be spoken on any screen when not on a phone call after pushing the Uconnect voice command button Navigation Ros Navigation Home ancels listening to uidan screen will shown your voice task on the touch Prompt is reen repeated en command Note Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and are underlined in the green shaded boxes 030536939 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 SEATS Use this switch to move the driver s seat up or down Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the forward or rearward or to recline the seatback vehicle NOTE The passenger s seat will move up or down WARNING forward or rearward e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Power Seats If Equipped 1 Seat Control On models equipped with power seats the switch is 2 Seatback Control located on the outbo
406. to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes a radar sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you NOTE e If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you ACC will maintain a fixed set speed e If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration not to exceed the original set speed automatically to maintain a preset following distance while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead WARNING e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a convenience system It is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibil ity to be attentive of road traffic and weather conditions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle ahead and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions Your complete attention is always re quired while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury The ACC system Does not react to pedestrians oncoming ve hicles and stationary objects i e a stopped ve hicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 WARNING Continued WARNING Cannot take street traffic and weather conditions You should switch off the ACC system into account and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions Does not pred
407. to the Uconnect Touch Supplement SIRIUS Setup After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft key the following settings will be available 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Channel Skip SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument panel press and hold the button until the setting is correct Da LJ 29 041236833 Analog Clock NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 IPode USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged
408. ton on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the SET S button followed by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 above Memory Position Recall NOTE e The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi tions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will display in the EVIC if equipped e The driver s seat belt must be unbuckled to recall memory positions To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons S 1 or 2 on the driver s door during a recall When a recall is cancelled the driver seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped stop mov ing A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver seat moves
409. tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the NNS TAK TING AND OPERATING 373 EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound
410. tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 Max loading as defined on the Tire and Load ing Information placard 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti lized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for information on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for informa tion on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 395 on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace ment procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
411. transmission will engage Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate Sec ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position The Mal function Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears To reset the trans mission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the PARK position 3 Turn OFF the engine 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Move the shift lever to the desired range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 If the transmission cannot be reset see your authorized dealer NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible AUTOSTICK AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of t
412. tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as 358 STARTING AND OPE RATING NEE Id Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck
413. ts of rotation are especially worthwhile with ageressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed 364 STARTING AND OPERATING The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed ER E C E XE 055703771 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for inform
414. tute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor d
415. u are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Press the BACK button to return to the main menu Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display Press the BACK button to return to the main menu 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Miles Per Gallon MPG The Miles Per Gallon MPG feature displays instanta neous fuel economy in a bar graph below the DTE this function cannot be reset Press the BACK button to return to the main menu Cruise Control Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ACC if equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control or Cruise is highlighted in the EVIC Status of the ACC or Cruise is display
416. ual or greater than 5 mph 8 km h they will automatically unfold Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features of Your Vehicle for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle zi 030405533 Rear Detection Zones NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 11 ft or 3 35 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extend
417. uality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The guality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high guality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Batter
418. uckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in t
419. ulate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging On systems with Manual Climate Controls the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Mix Floor and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be dis abled automatically if these modes are selected Attempt ing to use Recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Temperature Control ATC ATC Hard keys are located in the center of the instru ment panel Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch system screen Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO hard key or soft key button 9 on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature hard or soft control buttons 6 7 10 11 Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the s
420. uld cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis charged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting 418 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it if equipped or Traction Control System
421. umn if equipped and radio station presets 3 Press and release the SET S button on the memory switch 4 Within five seconds press and release the MEMORY button 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped will display which memory position has been set NOTE e Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile e The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature can be enabled through the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To program your RKE transmitters perform the follow ing 1 Remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go 2 Select desired memory profile 1 or 2 3 Once the profile has been recalled press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then press and 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles eguipped with the EVIC 4 Press and release the LOCK but
422. unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect Touch To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to ch
423. unroof switch is pressed the shade will automatically move to the middle position before the sunroof begins Express Open operation Venting Sunroof Express Press the center Vent button on the sunroof switch for less than one second and release and the sunroof glass will automatically vent fully open from any position then stop This is called Express Vent During Express Vent operation any sunroof switch press or shade switch press will stop the sunroof If the shade is closed when the vent switch is pressed the shade will automatically move to the middle position before the sunroof begins Express Vent operation Closing Sunroof Express Press the sunroof switch forward for less than one second and release and the sunroof glass will automatically close from any position then stop This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any sunroof switch press or shade switch press will stop the sunroof Opening Power Shade Express Press the shade switch rearward for less than one second and release and the shade will automatically open then stop This is called Express Shade Open If the shade is forward of the middle position it will move to the middle position then stop If the shade is at or rearward of the middle position it will move to the full open NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 position then stop During Express Shade Open opera tion any sunroof switch press
424. used by striking the WARNING Continued inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted aral times e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during body and can take the forces of an accident best very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under your injuries in an accident much worse You normal conditions However in an accident the belt will might suffer internal injuries or you could even lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc vehicle or being thrown out tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size WARNING e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not eguipped with seats and seat belts Continue
425. ut is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNINCG e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your pri pe hues Gas eee eee ee hag sees 501 O Prepare For The Appointment 501 df te dies Hi 44444 d ee dodo eren oa as 501 o Be Reasonable With Requests 501 N If You Need Assistance 501 H Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 502 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 502 Hn Medco Contactes 2a x Ee AD RAS uai 502 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 503 A Seve CONOCI sos wis sie we ale sees bee 3 503 W Warranty Information 504 EM MOPAR Parts oss xd ee REEN 504 Bl Reporting Safety Defects 504 O In The 50 United States And Washington D Cee ee N Sere ee eee ee eo O In Canada N Publication Order Forms 500 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN ed lll Depa
426. w to the first detent and release it when you want the switch again to close the window OR e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the AUTO Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection If first detent and hold to close the window manually Lift the window switch to the second detent release and ies ee the window will go up automatically There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO up operation push down on the switch briefly 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Reset Auto Up Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the pass
427. while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 8 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 9 AUTO Operation Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 10 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automati cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 11 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for warmer temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automati cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 12 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demist outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows e Panel Mode gt gt Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side
428. witch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403 e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum WARNING WARNING heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a You or others can be ba
429. y Location MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 81342982 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage NN MAINT
430. y and Hour of Manufacture MDH used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ene Ree ELE RE ner tae GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 386 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN ed Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the fro
431. you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not 388 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerou
432. you need them and could have an pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har collision ness and connector Continued NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness STARTING AND OPERATING 397 The wiring harness is not installed when leaving the factory it must be done by the dealer or customer Refer ed ha to the following illustrations M o o O O O o OT Of O70 O oo 790 ma O OS Co 057003765 2 Seven Pin Connector 1 Battery 5 Ground 057003766 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn i 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps Four Pin Connector jle Brakes 1 Female Pins 4 Park 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn 398 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN ed Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range select a lower gear range using the AutoStick feature NOTE Selecting a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous ope
433. ystem to function automatically NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Uconnect Touch System Set tings in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Manual Operation The system allows for manual selection of blower speed air distribution mode A C status and recirculation con trol The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi Hons Summer Operati

2011 Chrysler Owner Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents